Panasonic DMR ES45V User Manual To The Ba178e5b 039a 4fed 810d 03e57e59bb7f
User Manual: Panasonic DMR-ES45V to the manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 1
2
RQTV0141
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within
an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the
user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may
be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
-If you see this symbol-
(Inside of product)
CAUTION!
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN
MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC
SHOCK OR PRODUCT DAMAGE, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN,
MOISTURE, DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND
THAT NO OBJECTS FILLED WITH LIQUIDS,
SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE PLACED ON THE
APPARATUS.
CAUTION!
DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,
BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO
OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY OTHER
MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE VENTILATION VENTS.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE SCREWS.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the
European Union
i or orectT/F30O
3
RQTV0141
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read these operating instructions carefully before using the unit. Follow the safety instructions on the unit and the applicable safety instructions
listed below. Keep these operating instructions handy for future reference.
(1) Read these instructions.
(2) Keep these instructions.
(3) Heed all warnings.
(4) Follow all instructions.
(5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
(6) Clean only with dry cloth.
(7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
(8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat
registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
(9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-
type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than
the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided
for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet,
consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
(10)Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
(11)Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
(12)Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with
the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution
when moving the cart/apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
(13)Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
(14)Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is
required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been
spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus
has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
The precision parts in the unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
To clean the unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, thinner or benzine to clean the unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, possibly
making it impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner about once every year, depending on
frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
∫Cautions as to condensation
Condensation can cause unreliable playback of VHS recordings.
Condensation may form in the following cases,
≥The unit is brought from cold surroundings into a well-heated room.
≥The unit is suddenly brought from cool surroundings, such as an
air-conditioned room or car, to a place which is hot and humid.
≥During the rainy season.
In any of the above-mentioned conditions, do not operate the unit for
at least 2 hours. The unit is not equipped with a dew sensor.
∫Other precautions for installation
≥The unit should not be installed or operated near large magnets or
electromagnetic devices. Such devices can damage pre-recorded
VHS recordings.
≥Do not place any heavy objects atop the unit, and do not install it in
a confined space. Please allow for adequate air circulation.
≥The unit should not be mounted in a vertical position. It’s designed
to operate in the horizontal position.
∫When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household AC outlet. The unit consumes a small amount of power even when it is turned off.
Standby power consumption
∫Quick Start (l63)
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording on DVD-RAM°
°From the power off state, recording on DVD-RAM starts about 1 second after first pressing the [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] and then sequentially
pressing the [¥, REC] (Quick Start Mode).
Unit care
Lens cleaner: RP-CL720PP
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
4
RQTV0141
Table of contents
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Disc and card information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Discs you can use for recording and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Discs that cannot be played . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Concerning logo marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Cards usable on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
≥Suitable SD Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Using DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL and
+RW on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
The remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Disc and card handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Video cassette information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Inserting/Removing the SD card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Useful features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Connection with a television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Connection with a television and
cable box or satellite receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
If the antenna connector doesn’t match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
DVD output and DVD/VHS output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
To enjoy higher picture quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
≥Connecting to the TV S VIDEO IN terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
≥Connecting to the TV COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals. . . 16
Connecting an amplifier or system component . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting with an HDMI
(High Definition Multimedia Interface) terminal . . . . . . . . . . . 17
≥Connecting to a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
≥Connecting to an amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Control with HDMI (HDAVI Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
STEP 2 Plug-in Auto Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
≥Restart Plug-in Auto Tuning
(after relocation, for example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
≥Restart Set Channels Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
≥Adding and deleting channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
≥Set Clock Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Other settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Channel captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
≥Preset Channel Captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
≥Manual Channel Captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Selecting television type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
When other Panasonic products respond to
this remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
≥Set Clock Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
≥Adjust Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Removing Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Recording television programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Inserting discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Inserting a video cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Recording procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
≥Recording modes and
approximate recording times (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
≥Recording modes (VHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
≥Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
≥When the format confirmation screen is displayed . . . . . . . . 27
≥When remove a recorded disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
To specify a time to stop recording
– One Touch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Selecting audio to record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Auto Bilingual Choice Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Playing DVD while recording VHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Playing VHS while recording DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Watching the TV while recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
≥Playing from the beginning of the title you are recording
– Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
≥Playing a title previously recorded while recording
– Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Flexible Recording
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space) . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Scheduled Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Cautions for using scheduled recording on
DVD and VHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Programming scheduled recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
≥Cancel scheduled recording that has already begun . . . . . . .31
≥Release program from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
≥Auto SP/EP mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
≥Check, change or delete programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
≥When a menu screen appears on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Selecting recorded titles to play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Quick View (Play t1.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Fast forward and rewind– SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Skipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Slow-motion play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Frame-by-frame viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Direct play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
CM Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Create chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Skipping the specified time — Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Using menus to play MP3 and
still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Playing discs which contain both MP3 and
still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Playing MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
≥Using the tree screen to find a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
To show Pictures Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Playing still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
≥To select the still pictures in another folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
≥Start Slideshow/Slideshow settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
≥To rotate a still picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
≥To zoom in/out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
≥To delete a still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
≥To show the picture properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Playing a video cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Fast-forward/Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Cue/Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Jet Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Slow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Jet Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
S-VHS Quasi Playback (SQPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Repeat Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Adjusting the playback picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
≥Manual tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
≥Vertical locking adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
VHS Index Search System (VISS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Various on-screen display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Using on-screen menus/FUNCTIONS window and
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
≥Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
- Disc menu – Setting disc content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
- Play menu – Change play sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
- Video menu – Change picture quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
- Audio menu – Change sound effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
- Other menu – Change the display position . . . . . . . . . . . .40
FUNCTIONS window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Getting started
Recording
Playing back
M6VP&PC.book 4 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
5
RQTV0141
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Editing titles/Chapters and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Title operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
≥Delete Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
≥Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
≥Album View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
≥Edit Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
- Title Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
- Set Protection/Cancel Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
- Shorten Title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
- Change Thumbnail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
- Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
≥View Chapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
- Delete Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
- Create Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
- Combine Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
- View Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Creating, editing and playing playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Creating playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Editing playlists/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Playlist operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
≥Delete Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
≥Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
≥Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
- Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
- Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
- Playlist Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
- Change Thumbnail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
≥View Chapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
- Add Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
- Move Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
- Create Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
- Combine Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
- Delete Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
- View Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Editing still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Album and picture operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
≥Add Picture/Create Album. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
≥Delete Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
≥Set Protection/Cancel Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
≥Print Order (DPOF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
≥Album View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
≥Edit Album. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
- Album Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
- Delete Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
- Protection Setup/Cancel Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Transferring (Copying) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Before transferring (copying) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Transfer (Copying) from VHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
≥One Touch Transfer (Copying) (VHS lDVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
≥GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer (Copying) . . . . . . . . 51
Transfer (Copying) from DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
≥One Touch Transfer (Copying) (DVD lVHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
≥GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer (Copying) . . . . . . . . 53
≥Transfer (Copying) a DVD-Video, finalized DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, or +R DL . . . 54
Transfer (Copying) still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
≥Copying all the still pictures on a card
– Copy All Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
≥GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer (Copying) . . . . . . . . 55
Recording from an external device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
DV camcorder recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Deleting title or pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Selecting recorded titles or pictures to delete
– Delete Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Deleting title or picture during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
DVD and card Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Providing a disc with a name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Deleting all titles and playlists–Delete All Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Deleting all contents of a disc or card – Format . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
–Playback will start with: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment – Finalize . . . 61
Enabling the second layer on DL (dual-or double-layer
on single side) discs to be recordable–Close First Layer . . . 62
Creating Top Menu–Create DVD Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Entering a password (Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Summary of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Changing the speaker setting to suit your speakers. . . . . . . . . 66
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Product Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Limited Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
≥Pages to be referred to are indicated as (l ±±).
Please check and identify the supplied accessories. Use numbers indicated in parentheses when asking for replacement parts.
(Product numbers correct as of January 2006. These may be subject to change.)
To order accessories, refer to “Accessory Purchases” on page 77.
Editing
Transferring (Copying)
Convenient functions
Reference
Referencia rápida en español. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
(Spanish Quick Reference)
∫ About descriptions in these operating
instructions
Accessories
∏1
AC power supply cord
(VFA0461)
≥For use with the unit only.
Do not use it with other
equipment. Also, do not
use cords belonging to
other equipment with the
unit.
∏1 75 ≠ coaxial cable
(K2KZ2BA00001)
∏1 Remote control
(EUR7659Y70)
∏2 Batteries for the
remote control
R6 size
∏1 Audio/Video cable
(K2KA6BA00003)
∏1 DVD-RAM ∏1 HDMI cable
(DMR-ES46V only)
(K1HA19DA0002)
Product Registration Card
Please complete and return the included product
registration card, or register via the Internet at:
http://www.prodreg.com/panasonic/
6
RQTV0141
Disc and card information
°1You can record onto the second layer of dual- or double-layer discs after closing the first layer (l62). You will no longer be able to record to
the first layer after you do this (l9).
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
°2You may not be able to use +R recorded on this unit in another Panasonic DVD recorder and vice versa. Once the disc is finalized, however,
it can be played in the other unit.
°3The amount of the recordable disc space doesn’t increase even if the program is deleted when you use a one time recording disc.
°4This unit can use the high-speed recording discs shown in the chart, but using them will not shorten the recording time.
°5You can play 8x recording speed discs recorded on another equipment.
°6Play on DVD-R DL compatible equipment.
°7CPRM (l76) compatible discs only
°8The recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted.
≥The explanations concerning discs are indicated by [DVD], and those concerning video are indicated by [VHS].
≥We recommend using Panasonic discs. We recommend using DVD-RAM discs with cartridges to protect them from scratches and dirt.
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.
≥You cannot record programs that allow “One time only recording” to CPRM compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL and DVD-RW on this unit. You can
record other programs as DVD-Video format.
≥For the recording time, refer to “Recording modes and approximate recording times (DVD)” on page 26.
7
RQTV0141
°Play may be impossible on some DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format), CD-R or CD-RW discs due to the condition of the recording.
≥You can play still pictures (JPEG/TIFF), CD-DA, Video CD and MP3 format data recorded on CD-R/RW. Close the session or finalize the disc
after recording.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
Note about using a DualDisc
The digital audio content side of a DualDisc does not meet the technical specifications of the Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) format so play
may not be possible.
≥2.6/5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm (5z)
≥3.95/4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R recorded in DVD Video Recording format
≥DVD-R (DVD-Video format), DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL recorded on another unit and not finalized
(l61, “Enabling discs to be played on other equipment –Finalize”)
≥PAL discs (you can still play the audio on DVD-Audio)
≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “1” or “ALL”
≥Blu-ray
≥DVD-ROM, +R 8cm (3z), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,
SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, DivX Video Disc, etc.
Play-only discs
Disc type DVD-Video DVD-Audio DVD-RW
(DVD Video Recording format) Audio CD Video CD
Logo
–
Indicated in these
instructions with [DVD-V] [DVD-A] [-RW‹VR›] [CD] [VCD]
Instructions High quality
movie and
music discs
High fidelity
music discs
≥Played on
this unit in 2
channels
DVD-RW° recorded on another DVD
recorder
≥You can play programs that allow “One
time only recording” if they have been
recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
≥By formatting (l61) the disc, you can
record to it in DVD-Video format.
≥It may be necessary to finalize the disc
on the equipment used for recording.
Recorded
audio and
music
(including CD-
R/RW°)
CD-R° and
CD-RW° with
music
recorded in
MP3 (l34)
Still pictures
(JPEG and
TIFF)
recorded on
CD-R/RW°
Recorded
music and
video
(including CD-
R/RW°)
Regarding DVD-Audio
Some multi-channel DVD-Audio will prevent down-mixing (l76) of all or part of their contents if this is the manufacturer’s intention. Tracks
that are prevented from being down-mixed will not play properly on this unit (e.g. audio is played from the front two channels only). Refer to the
disc’s jacket for more information.
Discs that cannot be played Concerning logo marks
Dolby Digital (l64)
This is a method of coding digital signals
developed by Dolby Laboratories. Not only stereo
(2 channel) audio, these signals can also be multi-
channel audio. A large amount of audio information
can be recorded on one disc by this method.
DTS Digital Surround (l64)
This surround system is used in many movie
theaters around the world. The separation
between channels is good and the compression
ratio is low, so realistic sound effects are possible.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem with the
unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company.
≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.
≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.
Disc and card information
M6VP&PC.book 7 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
8
RQTV0141
Disc and card information
Structure of folders displayed by this unit
The following can be displayed on this unit.
* This can be also displayed
** Folders can be created on other equipment. However, these
folders cannot be selected as a copying destination.
≥The folder cannot be displayed if the numbers are all “0” (e.g.,
DCIM000, etc.).
≥If a folder name or file name has been input using other equipment,
the name may not be displayed properly or you may not be able to
play or edit the data.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with the following capacities (from
8 MB to 2 GB).
≥Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
≥Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
http://panasonic.co.jp/pavc/global/cs (This site is in English
only.)
≥If the SD Memory Card is formatted on other equipment, the time
spent for recording may become longer. Also if the SD Memory
Card is formatted on a PC, you may not be able to use it on this
unit.
In these cases, format the card on this unit. (l61, 76)
≥This unit supports SD Memory Cards formatted in FAT 12 system
and FAT 16 system based on SD Memory Card Specifications.
Cards usable on this unit
Type SD Memory Card, miniSDTM Card§, MultiMediaCard
Indicated in these
instructions by [SD]
Data that can be
recorded and played Still pictures
Instructions You can insert directly into the SD card slot.
§A miniSDTM card adaptor included with the miniSDTM card is necessary.
≥You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera, etc. (l35, 55)
≥You can set the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) for automatic printing on your home printer or at a photo
developing store. (l48, 76)
DCIM
DCIM
JPEG
XXXX .JPG
*
XXXXX
*
DCIM
IM CDPF or IMEXPORT
XXXX
XXXX .JPG
.TIF
XXXX
XXXX .JPG
.TIF
XXXX
XXXX .JPG
.TIF
XXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
DVD-RAM Card
: Numbers
XXX: Letters
(Picture folder)
(Higher folder) (Picture folder)
(Higher folder)
.TIF
XXXX .JPG
XXXX .JPG
XXXX .TIF
XXXX .JPG
XXXX .TIF
*
**
*
*
*
∫ Suitable SD Memory Cards
8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB,
256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB (Maximum)
M6VP&PC.book 8 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
9
RQTV0141
∫When recording an SAP program to DVD-R, etc.
Select the audio to record before recording or transferring (copying).
Some television programs are broadcast in SAP (Secondary Audio Program). You have to select the audio recording type before recording or
transferring (copying) them to DVD-R, etc.
∫Playing the disc on other DVD players
The disc must be finalized after recording or transferring (Copying) (l61).
It is necessary to finalize DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or transferring (copying) titles to them. You can then play them as a
commercially sold DVD-Video. However the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or transfer (copy).°
°You can record and transfer (copy) again if you format DVD-RW.
∫Recording to a DVD-R DL and +R DL
DVD-R DL and +R DL discs have two layers of recording surface on one side.
It is not possible to record continuously from the first layer to the second layer. Recording stops when space on the first layer becomes full.
You must close the first layer to start recording on the second layer. Closing makes the first layer unavailable for recording (editing is still
available). You cannot cancel closing. Make certain before proceeding.
Using DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL and +RW on this unit
Restrictions with DVD-R, etc.°
≥16:9 aspect programs are recorded in 4:3 aspect.
≥Either Main or SAP can be recorded for MTS broadcasts.
≥Playing the disc on other DVD players is not possible before finalizing.
°DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL and +RW are collectively referred to as “DVD-R, etc.” on this page.
Therefore, follow the steps below when you use DVD-R, etc.
10
RQTV0141
The remote control
∫About batteries
≥Insert so the poles
(i and j) match
those in the remote
control.
≥Do not use
rechargeable type
batteries.
Do not:
≥mix old and new batteries.
≥use different types at the same time.
≥heat or expose to flame.
≥take apart or short circuit.
≥attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
Note
≥If you cannot operate the unit or TV using the remote control after
changing the batteries, please re-enter the codes (l21).
∫How to use the remote control
Aim at the sensor, avoiding obstacles, at a maximum range of 7 m
(23 feet) directly in front of the unit.
Notes
≥Keep the transmission window and the unit’s sensor free from
dust.
≥Operation can be affected by strong light sources, such as direct
sunlight, inverter fluorescent lamps, and the glass doors on
cabinets.
∫How to hold a disc or card
Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.
∫Concerning non-cartridge discs
Be careful about scratches and dirt.
∫If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
∫Handling precautions
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and unbalanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other
strange things.
≥Do not drop, stack, or cause impact to discs. Do not place objects
on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
-Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs etc.).
-Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
-Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart shapes.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
-In direct sunlight.
-In very dusty or humid areas.
-Near a heater.
-Locations susceptible to significant differences in temperature
changes (condensation can occur).
-Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
or cartridges when you are not using them.
R6/LR6, AA
30
30
2020
Remote control signal sensor
7 m (23 feet) directly
in front of the unit
Disc and card handling
M6VP&PC.book 10 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
11
RQTV0141
Video cassette information
∫Video cassettes
≥Break off the video cassette’s tab to prevent accidental erasure. Cover the hole with a double layer of
adhesive tape when you want to use the video cassette for recording again.
≥You can use video cassettes with the VHS and S-VHS marks, but the unit is unable to make full use of the
characteristics of S-VHS video cassettes.
∫Video cassette care
≥Poor quality or damaged video cassettes can cause the heads to become dirty and malfunction. Store your video cassettes carefully and
discard them when they become dirty or damaged.
≥Never use video cassettes on which juice has been spilled or those that are extremely damaged since this will not only cause the heads to
become dirty, but will also make the unit malfunction.
∫Maintenance
Cleaning the video heads
Dirt on the video heads can cause poor recording and play.
If the picture does not improve, use an optional head-cleaning cassette (part number
NV-TCL30PT). If the problem persists, seek advice from a qualified service person.
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or remove the
card. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the card’s contents.
Automatic drive select function
If you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card Operations” screen is displayed. Select an item and press [ENTER] to switch to
the SD drive (l35, 55). If you remove an SD card, the DVD drive is automatically selected.
You can enjoy both DVD, VHS and SD with the unit.
This DVD Recorder can record images and sounds in high quality to rapid random access capable DVD media. This has resulted in many new
features that outperform older tape formats. The following information summarizes a few of these features.
∫DVD
Progressive output (l16, 20)
If you connect the unit with a progressive output-compatible TV, you
can enjoy higher-quality and less-flicker images than conventional
TVs (of the interlace output type) can present.
Finalize (l61)
This function enables you to play recorded DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) +R and +R DL on other players.
Instant play (l32)
This function can quickly find and play a video program you wish to
watch. Direct Navigator guides you to the beginning of a previously
recorded video immediately.
Quick view (l32)
This function allows you to watch news, information and other
programs in a short time.
Chasing play (l28)
There is no need to wait until recording is complete. Without
stopping recording, you can play the video currently being recorded
from its beginning.
Instant recording (l25)
You no longer need to search for empty disc space. By pressing the
recording button, the unit finds available recording space and begins
recording right away.
Simultaneous recording and play (l28)
With this function, you can play a previously recorded video program
while recording another program.
Time Slip (l33)
This function enables you to jump to the scene you specify during
play.
One touch transfer (copy) (l50, 52)
This function can copy video from VHS to DVD and vice versa.
DV input terminal (l57)
The DV camcorder recording function of this unit lets you easily copy
a video to the DVD by connecting only a single DV cable.
∫VHS
Long recording (l26)
With this function, you can record approx. 10 hours of video onto a
T-120 cassette, for example.
∫SD card
SD card slot (l above)
The SD card slot of this unit lets you play digital camera photographs
and copy them from a card to DVD-RAM for easy storage without
using a computer.
Tab
Inserting/Removing the SD card
Opening the cover Inserting the card Removing the card Closing the cover
REC
Press down.
COPYING
REC
ADAPTER
Insert the card label up with the cut-off corner on the right.
(Do not forget to close the cover. lright)
Press on the center of
the card until it clicks into
place.
If you are using a
miniSDTM card, insert it
into the miniSDTM card
adaptor that comes
with the card.
Insert and remove this
adaptor from the unit.
REC
1
2
Press on the center
of the card.
Pull it straight out.
REC
Push up.
Keep the small memory cards such as the SD Memory Card out of reach of children. If swallowed, seek
medical advice immediately.
Useful features
The remote control/Disc and card handling/Video cassette information/Inserting/Removing the SD card/Useful features
M6VP&PC.book 11 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
12
RQTV0141
Control reference guide
(1) Turn the unit on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l18
(2) Select drive (DVD, VHS or SD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l above
(3) Select channels and title numbers etc./Enter numbers
(4) Cancel/Reset the tape counter
(5) Basic operations for recording and play
(6) Skip the specified time/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l33
Jet rewind button (JET REW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l37
(7) Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l32, 34
(8) Selection/Enter, Frame-by-frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l18, 33
(9) Show sub menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l36, 41, 45
(10)Select audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l27, 33
View select (A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l53
(11)Show on-screen menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l39
View select (B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l53
(12)Start recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l25
(13)Change recording mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l25, 30
(14)Transmission window
(15)TV operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l21, 28
(16)Channel select/
TRACKING/V-LOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l38
(17)Add/delete channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l19
(18)Input select (IN1, IN2, DV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l57
(19)Delete items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l59
(20)Skip a minute forward. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l33
(21)Show scheduled recording list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l30
(22)Show FUNCTIONS window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l40
(23)Return to previous screen
(24)Select VCR/TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l23
(25)Create chapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l33
(26)Start Flexible Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l29
(27)Show status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l38, 40
Notes
≥Buttons such as the [¥, REC] button do not protrude as much as
other buttons to stop them from being pressed accidentally.
≥The word “button” is not used in these operating instructions so
“Press the [ENTER] button.” is shown as “Press [ENTER].”
≥You can use this remote control to operate your TV if you set the
TV manufacturer code (l21).
Remote control
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUSESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCK
TRACKING/V-LOCK
RESET
RESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(6)
(3)
(9)
(15)
(16)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(8)
(25)
(26)
(14)
(23)
(17)
(24)
(27)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
∫[DRIVE SELECT] button
13
RQTV0141
(1) Cassette eject button (<, EJECT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l24
(2) Disc tray open/close button (<, OPEN/CLOSE). . . . . . l24
(3) Stop button (∫) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l32, 37
(4) Play/t1.3 button (1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l32, 37
(5) Recording button (¥, REC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l25, 57
(6) DVD/VHS POWER on/off button (Í/I, POWER). . . . . . . l18
≥To switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa.
In the standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small
amount of power.
(7) IN2 input terminals (IN2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l57
(8) DVD-SEARCH, VHS-REW/FF buttons (V/6, 5/W)
(9) Channel up/down buttons (CH, X, W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l38
(10)DVD/VHS/SD drive indicator
≥Lights when the DVD, VHS or SD drive is selected.
(11)DRIVE SELECT button
≥Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
(12)SD card slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l11
(13)Connector for a digital video (DV) camcorder. . . . . . . . l57
(14)One Touch Transfer (copying) operation button
≥From VHS to DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l50
≥From DVD to VHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l52
Common to DVD/VHS/SD
[A] Recording mode indicator
DVD:
XP, SP, LP, EP: (l26)
XP SP LP EP (all on): FR mode (l29)
VHS:
SP, LP°, EP, VP: (l26)
°Playback only
[B] TV indicator
≥The indicator lights during the TV mode and it goes out during
the VCR mode. You can switch the mode by using [VCR/TV].
(l23)
[C] Main display
≥Current time
≥Disc recording and play counter
≥VHS recording and play counter
≥Transfer (Copying) messages
≥Miscellaneous messages, etc.
VHS
(1) Scheduled recording indicator ( ) (l30)
On:
When a scheduled recording program is registered and
recordable tape is inserted.
Flashes:
The scheduled recording indicator flashes when the unit cannot
go to scheduled recording standby (e.g. there is no tape, etc).
(2) Tape indicator
(3) Tape operation status
DVD
(1) Scheduled recording indicator ( ) (l30)
On:
When a scheduled recording program is registered and a
recordable disc is inserted.
Flashes:
The scheduled recording indicator flashes when the unit cannot
go to scheduled recording standby (e.g. there is no disc, etc).
(2) Disc operation status
(3) Disc indicator
SD
(1) SD Card indicator
Main unit
CH
CH
POWER
DRIVE
SELECT
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
S VIDEO
IN 2
VIDEO /MONO AUDIO R
L
COPYING
COPYING
(2)
(1) (5)
(3) (4)
(14)
(6) (7) (8) (9) (11) (13)
(10) (12)
The unit’s display
(2) (3) (2) (3) (1)
(1)(1) [A] [B]
[C]
Control reference guide
M6VP&PC.book 13 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
14
RQTV0141
STEP 1 Connection
This section includes diagrams of two common methods of connection (A-B, pages 14 to 15). Please connect using the one that best
suits you.
≥Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about connection methods. (This is in English only.)
http://www.panasonic.com/consumer_electronics/dvd_recorder/dvd_connection.asp
≥Before doing any connection, turn off all the equipments and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Peripheral equipments and optional cables are sold separately unless otherwise indicated.
≥You need to subscribe to a cable TV service to enjoy viewing their programme.
≥Consult your service provider regarding appropriate cable box.
∫The unit’s RF OUT terminal
The picture and sound signal from this unit go through the RF OUT
terminal to the television.
Refer to page 15 if the antenna connector doesn’t match.
∫When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household AC outlet. This unit
consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
(approx. 8 W).
TV TV
The unit
VCR
VCR
The unit
∫Do not connect the unit through a video cassette
recorder
Video signals sent through video cassette recorders will be
affected by copyright protection systems and the picture will not be
shown correctly on the TV.
A Connection with a television
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
YPBPR
OPTICAL
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
RF
IN
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
AC IN
DVD PRIORITY OUT
AV OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
RL
Red White
Red White
Yell
ell
owRed White Yellow
1
2
To RF IN
To
To
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
To
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
Television
This unit’s rear panelAudio/Video cable
(Included)
To RF OUT
To household
AC outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
AC power supply cord (Included)
Connect only after all other connections are complete.
75 h
h
coaxial
cable
(Included)
75 h
h
coaxial
cable
Cable from wall or
antenna signal
3
4
Red White
Red White
Yell
ell
owRed White Yellow
∫ Connection (with Audio/Video cable)
Connect in numerical order 1 to 4.
≥After this connection, set the RF output channel “OFF” (l18),
and then press TV/VIDEO button of TV remote controller to
select the AV input mode to the connected TV terminal. You can
watch a video from this unit on your TV.
∫Connection (without Audio/Video cable)
You do not need to connect “3”.
The unit supplies a signal to the TV via the 75 ≠ coaxial cable on
channel 3 or 4. It is possible to view the video picture on your TV in
the same way that you watch TV broadcasts.
≥After this connection, set the RF output channel “CH3” or “CH4”
(l18).
M6VP&PC.book 14 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
15
RQTV0141
Use one of the following connections to suit the antenna lead to the unit’s RF IN terminal, and the 75 ≠ coaxial cable to the antenna terminals on
the equipment (television etc.). Refer to other equipment’s operating instructions.
The unit has DVD/VHS COMMON output terminals and DVD PRIORITY output terminals.
v
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
≥For DVD/VHS COMMON output terminals, both DVD and VHS
signals can be output.
DVD PRIORITY OUT
≥You can also playback a tape with the DVD PRIORITY output
terminal except while recording, or making a scheduled recording,
on the DVD.
B Connection with a television and cable box or satellite receiver
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
YPBPR
OPTICAL
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
RF
IN
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
AC IN
AUDIO
VIDEO S VIDEO
Satellite Cable
RL
RF
IN OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
RL
Red White
Red White
Yell
ell
owRed White Yellow
Red White
Red White
Yell
ell
ow
Cable box or
Satellite receiver
Satellite antenna
(Satellite receiver only)
1
5
Red White Yellow
2
3
To RF IN
Television
(Included)
To RF OUT
Cable from wall or
antenna signal
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
This unit’s rear panelAudio/Video cable
(Included) 75 h
h
coaxial
cable
75 h
h
coaxial
cable
6
Audio/Video cable
To IN1
AC power supply cord (Included)
To household
AC outlet
4
AV OUT
7
75 h
h
coaxial
cable
DVD PRIORITY OUT
To
To
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
To
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
Red White
Red White
Yell
ell
owRed White Yellow
Red White
Red White
Yell
ell
owRed White Yellow
If the antenna connector doesn’t match
Other antenna connections to the unit Other antenna connections to the television
∫A single twin lead ∫A twin lead terminal
∫A twin lead and a coaxial cable ∫A twin lead and coaxial plug terminal
∫Two twin leads ∫Two twin lead terminals
DVD output and DVD/VHS output
300–75 ≠ transformer
from the antenna
(Flat) Twin lead
300 ≠ cable
To this unit’s RF IN
terminal 75 ≠ coaxial cable
75–300 ≠ transformer
Television
VHF or UHF
from the antenna
(Flat) Twin lead 300 ≠ cable
To this unit’s RF IN
terminal
VHF/UHF band mixer
(Round)75 ≠ coaxial cable
VHF/UHF band separator
Television
75 ≠ coaxial cable
VHF
UHF
from the antenna
To this unit’s RF
IN terminal
300–75 ≠ transformer
(Flat) Twin lead
300 ≠ cable
VHF/UHF band mixer
75 ≠ coaxial cable
VHF/UHF band separator
Television
VHF
UHF
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
YPBPR
OPTICAL
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM) R-AUD
DVD PRIORITY OUT
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
DVD/VHS COMMON output
DVD PRIORITY output
STEP 1 Connection
M6VP&PC.book 15 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
16
RQTV0141
STEP 1 Connection
S VIDEO OUT terminal
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
After completing “Connection with a television” (l14) or
“Connection with a television and cable box or satellite receiver”
(l15), connect S VIDEO cable as illustration below.
Usually you can watch a picture from INPUT2 terminal. When you
want to playback VHS while recording on DVD, change to INPUT1
terminal.
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal
These terminals can be used for either interlace or progressive
output (l76) and provide a purer picture than the S VIDEO OUT
terminal.
After completing “Connection with a television” (l14) or
“Connection with a television and cable box or satellite receiver”
(l15), connect COMPONENT VIDEO cable as illustration below.
Usually you can watch a picture from COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
terminal. When you want to playback VHS while recording on DVD,
change to INPUT1 terminal.
≥Connect to terminals of the same color.
∫Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal
≥To enjoy multi-channel surround on DVD-Video,
connect an amplifier with a built-in decoder
displaying these logo marks using an optical digital
audio cable and change the settings in “Digital Audio
Output” (l64).
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not
included), check the terminal shape of the connected
equipment.
≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.
≥Even if using this connection, output will be only
2 channels when playing DVD-Audio. ∫Connection to a stereo amplifier
To enjoy higher picture quality
∫ Connecting to the TV S VIDEO IN terminal
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
YPBPR
OPTICAL
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
DVD PRIORITY OUT
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
S Video cable
Television
Red White
Red White
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
S VIDEO
IN
RL
Audio cable
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
RL
Red White Yellow
This unit’s
rear panel
Audio/Video cable
INPUT1
INPUT2
(Included)
Red White
Red White
Red White
Red White
Yell
ell
owRed White Yellow
∫ Connecting to the TV COMPONENT VIDEO
IN terminals
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
YPBPR
OPTICAL
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
DVD PRIORITY OUT
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO IN
RL
YP
B
P
R
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
RL
Red White
Red White
Yell
ell
ow
Red White
Red White
INPUT1
Red White Yellow
Red White
Red White
Yell
ell
owRed White Yellow
Component
Video cable
Television
Audio cable
This unit’s
rear panel
Audio/Video
udio/Video
ca
ca
ble
le
Audio/Video
cable
(Included)
(Included)
(Included)
Red White
Red White
Connecting an amplifier or system component
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
YPBPR
OPTICAL
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
RF
IN
DVD PRIORITY OUT
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
AC IN
OPTICAL IN
AUDIO IN
RL
Red White
Red White
Optical digital audio cable
Do not bend sharply when
connecting.
Insert fully, with this side
facing up.
Red White
Red White
Red White
Red White
Audio cable
AV OUT
Amplifier’s
rear panel
This unit’s
rear panel
Amplifier’s
rear panel
M6VP&PC.book 16 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
17
RQTV0141
HDMI is the next-generation interface for digital devices. When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video
signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High
Definition Television), the output can be switched to 1080i or 720p HD video.
Set the following:
From the Setup menu (l65), Set “HDMI Video Output” and “HDMI Audio Output” to “On”.
≥Please use HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥If the speaker setup cannot be completed on the amplifier, then
use the “HDMI Connection Speakers Setting” setting (l65).
≥
If connecting to equipment incompatible with CPPM (Content
Protection for Prerecorded Media,
l
76), copy-protected DVD-Audio
cannot be output through the HDMI terminal. Connect to the amplifier
with an optical digital cable or audio cables (red and white).
If connecting with a Panasonic television equipped with the HDAVI Control function, you can use this convenient function to control both the
recorder and the television.
After connecting the unit to a television using an HDMI cable, set “Ctrl with HDMI” to “On”. (l65)
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number: RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m/4.9 ft.), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m/9.8 ft.), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m/16.4 ft.), etc.
≥Depending on the cable used, this function may not be possible.
For the connection to be completed and activate correctly, turn on all HDAVI Control compatible equipment and select this unit’s input
channel on the connected television. Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.
When the following operations are performed the television will
automatically switch the input channel and displays the
corresponding action.
-When play starts on the unit
-When an action that uses the display screen is performed (e.g.,
Direct Navigator screen, schedule recording screen)
Note
≥When the unit is recording on the DVD drive, the output does not
automatically switch even if when you operate the VHS.
The television automatically turns on and the corresponding display
appears when the following operations are performed with the
television in standby mode.
-When play starts on the unit
-When an action that uses the display screen is performed (e.g.,
Direct Navigator screen, schedule recording screen)
Note
≥When the unit is recording on the DVD drive, the television does
not automatically turn on even if when you operate the VHS.
When the television is turned off, this unit is also automatically turned off.
The unit automatically turns off even if the FUNCTIONS screen, the
status message or the on-screen menu is displayed, during
playback or when the unit is only scheduled recording.
Note
≥Even if the television is turned off, the unit will not turn off at the
same time in the following conditions:
-When you pressed [¥, REC] and the unit is recording
-When copying
-When finalizing
For your reference
≥When [1, PLAY] is pressed on this unit for “automatic input
switching” or “power on link”, the playback is not immediately
displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the
contents from where playback starts.
In this case, press [:, SKIP] or [6, SLOW/SEARCH] to go
back to where playback started.
≥
When the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (Optical) terminal is used for audio
output and the unit is connected to the television with a HDMI cable,
set “HDMI Audio Output” to “Off” in the setup menu.
(l65)
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) terminal
∫ Connecting to a TV ∫ Connecting to an amplifier
YPB
COMPON
E
DIGITAL
A
(PCM/BI
T
AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L
R-AUDIO-
L
YPBPR
OPTICAL
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
DVD
/
D
AV OUT
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
HDMI cable
(Only included in DMR-ES46V)
Please use a cable
5.0 m or less in length for
stability and prevention of
deterioration in video quality.
HDMI IN
Television Television
HDMI AV OUT
HDMI AV OUT
HDMI IN
Amplifier
This Unit
This Unit
Control with HDMI (HDAVI Control)
Automatic input switching
Power on link
Power off link
Equipment compatible with and equipment scheduled to be
compatible with HDAVI Control (as of January 2006).
Plasma TVs: TH-42/50/58PX600, TH-37/42/50PX60,
TH-58PX60,TH-42PD60, TH-42/50PX6
LCD TVs: TC-26/32LX600, TC-23/26/32LX60, TC-26/32LE60
LCD projection TVs:
PT-52/56/61LCX66
Receiver: SA-XR57P
¢The HDAVI Control function will only work if you can connect this
unit with Panasonic equipment equipped with the HDAVI control
function.
Before purchasing equipment, confirm that it has the HDAVI
Control function.
STEP 1 Connection
≥
If connecting to equipment incompatible with CPPM (Content
Protection for Prerecorded Media,
l
76), copy-protected DVD-Audio
cannot be output through the HDMI terminal. Connect the audio cables
(red, white) to the corresponding audio input terminals.
≥
If you are connecting to equipment that is only compatible with
2 channel output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed
(
l
76) and output as 2 channels. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content
Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI
input terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display property or at all when
connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
M6VP&PC.book 17 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
18
RQTV0141
STEP 2 Plug-in Auto Tuning
After plugging the unit into your household AC outlet and pressing
[Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on for the first time, the unit
assists you to set the on-screen language, and automatically tunes
in all the channels it can receive and sets the clock.
The unit automatically determines the type of transmission (airwaves
or cable) and puts them into channels as follows.
Preparation
≥Turn on the TV and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to the unit. (Example: AV input, CH3 or CH4)
≥If you connect the unit through a cable box or satellite receiver
(l15), tune to your local PBS for Auto Clock Setting to work.
If there is no local PBS, set the clock manually (l19, “Set Clock
Manually”).
[1] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER].
[2] Press [CH, W, X] to
select an RF output
channel number.
The unit’s display
Each time you press the button:
CH 3 (Default setting) (# CH4 (# OFF
^-----------------------------------------------J
[3] Use [3, 4] to select the
language and press
[ENTER].
[4] Press [3, 4] to select
“4:3 TV” or “16:9
Widescreen TV” and
press [ENTER].
[5] Press [3, 4] to select
“On” or “Off” and press
[ENTER].
If you activate “Quick Start”
function, select “On”.
[6] Press [3, 4] to select
“Internal TV Tuner” or
“Input” and press
[ENTER].
When you do not set channels
on this unit, select “Input”. The
unit then displays “Set Clock
Manually” screen.
Set the clock manually. (l19)
[7] Press [ENTER] to start Plug-in Auto Tuning.
≥The unit then proceeds with Auto Clock Setting. The time is
displayed when Auto Clock Setting is finished.
≥DST, Daylight Saving Time, shows the summertime setting.
≥Time Zone shows the time difference from Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).
EST (Eastern Standard Time) l GMT j5
CST (Central Standard Time) l GMT j6
MST
(Mountain Standard Time)l GMT j7
PST (Pacific Standard Time) l GMT j8
AST (Alaska Standard Time) l GMT j9
HST (Hawaii Standard Time) l GMT j10
For other areas: xx hr
∫When one of the following screens appears
“No channels were found.”
After turning off the unit, confirm
following and perform setup
again.
≥Confirm the antenna cable is
firmly connected to RF IN
terminal.
≥If you do not set channels on this unit, select “Input” in step 6.
“Auto Clock Setting is
incomplete.”
Press [ENTER] and set clock
manually. (l19)
[8] Press [ENTER].
Band Channel
Antenna Mode
(Airwaves)
VHF 2 to 13
UHF 14 to 69
CableTV Mode
(Cable)
VHF 2 to 13
CATV LOW BAND 95 to 99
CATV MID/SUPER BAND 14 to 36
CATV HYPER BAND 37 to 65
ULTRA BAND 66 to 94
100 to 125
SPECIAL CATV CHANNEL 1
Regarding DST (Daylight Saving Time) (l19)
Legal revision is expected to change the DST period in 2007.
When you use the unit with DST on, the change may cause the
unit’s clock to go behind the actual time. Check the DST setting in
Set Clock manually in the Setup menu, set DST off and reset the
clock precisely if you are using this function.
Connection (without Audio/
Video cable):
Select “CH3” or “CH4” which
displays the screen on the right.
Connection (with Audio/Video
cable):
Select “OFF”.
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
µ
Í
CH,
ADD/DLT
RETURN
FUNCTIONS
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
CH, W, X
Numeric
buttons
Select Language
Seleccione el idioma
Sélection de Langue
Press ENTER
Pulse ENTER
Appuyer sur ENTER
English
Français
Español
The unit’s display
About “Quick Start” function
If you set Quick Start to on, you can start recording to DVD-
RAM about 1 second after you press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER]
to turn the unit on and then sequentially press [¥, REC].
The following happens when you have selected “On”.
≥Power consumption in standby mode increases because
power is supplied to the unit.
Select TV type and press ENTER.
(Please refer to Operation Instruction
for details)
4:3 TV
16:9 Widescreen TV
ENTER
Aspect Ratio Selection
The unit can be turned on faster, in about
1 second. Please note that Quick Start
mode slightly increases power
consumption when the unit is off.
(See Operation instructions for details)
Turn Quick Start on ?
On
Off
ENTER
Quick start setting
Please select the source from which this
unit will record each time it is turned
on. Note: Selecting "Internal TV Tuner"
will start the Auto Channel Clock
Settings process.
This one time process takes a few minutes.
Internal TV Tuner
Input
ENTER
Default Recording Source
Set Channels Automatically
Ch.
Set Channels Automatically
Proceeding . . .
1 1 1
1
Set Clock Automatically
Auto Clock Setting is complete.
4/4/2007 12:15 AM
DST-------------- On
Time Zone
------- CST
No channels were found.
Please check antenna or cable connection,
then...
Press ENTER again.
Set Channels Automatically
Auto Clock setting is incomplete.
Press ENTER
to set clock manually.
Set Clock Automatically
M6VP&PC.book 18 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
19
RQTV0141
∫If the clock is an hour slower or faster than the actual
time
Select “j1” or “i1” in “Adjust Time Zone” in the Setup menu (l63).
Signal source, RF output channel, channel caption revert to the
default values when you perform the procedure below.
Scheduled recording settings are also cleared.
When the unit is on and stopped
[1] Press and hold [CH, W] and [CH, X] on the main
unit for about 5 seconds.
The unit turns off.
[2] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on.
Plug-in Auto Tuning starts.
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[4] Select “Channel” with [3, 4] and press [2,1].
[5] Select “Signal Source (RF IN)” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[6] Select “Antenna” or “Cable TV” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[7] Select “Set Channels Automatically” with [3,4]
and press [ENTER].
[8] Press [ENTER].
≥Auto Channel Setting starts. This takes a few minutes.
[9] Press [ENTER].
∫To cancel in the middle
Press [RETURN].
∫To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
Add or delete channels if necessary channels are not set or
unnecessary channels are set.
[1] Press the numeric buttons to select a channel.
Antenna Mode (Airwaves)
e.g., “5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
CableTV Mode (Cable)
e.g., “5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
“115”: [1] )[1] )[5]
≥You can also use [CH, X, W] to select a channel.
[2] Press [CH, ADD/DLT]. e.g., The channel is deleted.
“Clock Settings” made here are applied to VHS as well.
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[4] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [2, 1].
[5] Select “Clock Settings” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[6] Select “Set Clock Manually” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[7] Use [2, 1] to select the item you want to
change, and press [3, 4] to change the setting.
≥DST (Daylight Saving Time): On or Off
If you select “On”, the clock is advanced one hour starting at
2 a.m. on the first Sunday in April and ending at 2 a.m. on the
last Sunday in October.
≥Time Zone (l22)
[8] Press [ENTER].
≥The clock starts.
≥When you change the time zone, the recording times for titles
recorded before the time zone adjustment also change to
correspond to the new time zone.
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ Restart Plug-in Auto Tuning
(after relocation, for example)
∫ Restart Set Channels Automatically
No Disc
FUNCTIONS No Disc
Program
Copy
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
No Disc
FUNCTIONS No Disc
Program
Copy
Other Functions
Setup
ENTER
RETURN
Manual Channel Captions
Signal Source (RF IN)
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
Set Channels Automatically
Channel Captions
Preset Channel Captions
Antenna
Setup
Antenna
Channel
Setup
Disc
Cable TV
Signal Source (RF IN)
Setup
∫ Adding and deleting channels
∫ Set Clock Manually
The unit’s display
Channel 15 Deleted
Off Timer
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
Remote Control Code
Clock Settings
6 Hours
Set Code 1
Quick Start
Restore Default Settings
On
Setup
VHS
Set Clock Manually
/ :
/
SAT PM
Month Day Year Hour Minute
1112 00
2000
DST Time Zone
Off EST
ENTER
STEP 2 Plug-in Auto Tuning
M6VP&PC.book 19 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
20
RQTV0141
Other settings
You can use the preset captions, or manually enter new ones
yourself.
The captions you enter are used as channel names and displayed
on the Direct Navigator screen.
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other
Functions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with [3,
4] and press [ENTER].
[4] Select “Channel” with
[3, 4] and press [2,1].
≥Go to the item you want to set
next.
≥Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Channel captions”.
[5] Select “Preset Channel
Captions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[6] Use [3, 4] to select the
caption and press [1].
You can choose from the
following captions.
ABC, PBS, CBS, CNN, FOX,
ESPN, NBC, HBO, A&E, AMC, FAM, MAX, MTV, SHOW, TBS,
USA, TNT, CBC, UPN, CTV, WB, TSN, DSC, GLOB
≥When selecting the caption, press and hold [3,4] to scroll up
and down the screen quickly.
[7] Use [3,4] to select the channel corresponding
to the caption and press [2].
≥Channels are displayed only when they contain a station and if
captions have not been added manually.
≥To delete the channel number, press [¢, CANCEL].
≥Repeat steps 6 and 7 as necessary.
[8] Press [ENTER].
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
≥Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Channel captions”.
[5] Select “Manual Channel Captions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[6] Use [3, 4] to select the channel and press [1].
≥Channels are only displayed if they contain a station and if
preset captions have not been added.
[7] Use [3, 4] to select the first character and
press [1].
≥You can choose from the following characters:
A to Z, 0 to 9, -, &, !, /, (space)
≥To delete the caption, press [¢, CANCEL].
≥Repeat this step to enter the other characters.
[8] Use [2, 1] to return to the “Channel Number”
column.
≥Repeat steps 6 to 8 to enter other channels.
[9] Press [ENTER].
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
You do not have to change the setting when connected to a 4:3
standard aspect TV that is not compatible with progressive output.
(l76)
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[4] Select “TV Screen” with [3, 4] and press [2,1].
[5] Select “TV Type” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
≥Aspect 4:3/Aspect 16:9:
≥480p/480i:
Select “480p” if the TV is compatible with progressive output.
[6] Use [3, 4] to select the item and press
[ENTER].
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
Channel captions
∫ Preset Channel Captions
CHAPTER
CREATE
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VCR/TV
SUB MENU
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
TRACKING/V-LOCK
RESET
DVD/VHS
TV/VIDEO
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
Í
RETURN
FUNCTIONS
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
Numeric
buttons
No Disc
FUNCTIONS No Disc
Program
Copy
Other Functions
Setup
ENTER
RETURN
Manual Channel Captions
Signal Source (RF IN)
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
Set Channels Automatically
Channel Captions
Preset Channel Captions
Antenna
Setup
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
Preset Channel Captions
Caption Channel Number
--
--
GLOB
ABC
--
--
PBS
CBS
Setup
ENTER
VHS
∫ Manual Channel Captions
Selecting television type
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
Manual Channel Captions
Channel Number Caption
AAAA
----
6
----
8
10
----
----
12
23
Setup
ENTER
VHS
Aspect 4:3 & 480i
4:3 TV
16:9 Aspect (Widescreen TV)
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
Aspect 4:3 & 480p
Aspect 16:9 & 480i
Aspect 16:9 & 480p
TV Type
Setup
ENTER
VHS
4:3 16:9
4:3 standard aspect TV 16:9 widescreen TV
M6VP&PC.book 20 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
21
RQTV0141
To turn the TV on/off, change the TV input mode, select the TV
channel and change the TV volume by means of this remote control,
set the remote control as follows.
Point the remote control at the TV
While pressing [Í, POWER TV], enter the code
using the numeric buttons.
e.g., 0250: press [0] > [2] > [5] > [0].
Manufacturer and Code No.
≥Test by turning on the TV and changing channels. Repeat the
procedure until you find the code that allows correct operation.
≥If your TV brand is not listed or if the code listed for your TV does
not allow control of your TV, this remote control is not compatible
with your TV.
Change the remote control code on the main unit and on the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products
close together. When changing the remote control code, make sure
the two codes are same.
Use “1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other
Functions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with [3,
4] and press [ENTER].
[4] Select “Setup” with [3,
4] and press [2,1].
[5] Select “Remote Control Code” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[6] Use [3, 4] to select the code (1, 2 or 3) and
press [ENTER].
≥The code on the unit has been set.
[7] While pressing [ENTER], press and hold for
about 2 seconds the numeric button ([1], [2] or
[3]) corresponding to the code you selected in
step 6.
≥The code on the remote control has been set.
[8] Press [ENTER].
∫When the following indicator appears on the unit’s
display
The unit’s remote control code
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
code (lstep 7).
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
Television operation
Panasonic
National
QUASAR
0051, 0250 PHILIPS (RC-5) 0054
RCA 0047
SAMSUNG 0060, 0587,
0702
FISHER 0154 SANYO 0154
GE 0047 SHARP 0093, 0165
GOLDSTAR 0178, 0317,
0457
SONY 0000
HITACHI 0145 SYLVANIA 0054
JVC 0053 THOMSON 0047
LG 0178, 0317,
0457
TOSHIBA 0156
MAGNAVOX 0054 ZENITH 0017
MITSUBISHI 0150
When other Panasonic products
respond to this remote control
No Disc
FUNCTIONS No Disc
Program
Copy
Other Functions
Setup
ENTER
RETURN
Other settings
M6VP&PC.book 21 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
22
RQTV0141
Other settings
“Clock Settings” made here are applied to VHS as well.
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[4] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [2, 1].
[5] Select “Clock Settings” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[6] Select “Set Clock Automatically” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[7] Press [ENTER].
≥Auto setting starts. This can take some time, up to a few hours
in some cases. The following screen appears when setting is
complete.
≥If the time was not set correctly, use manual clock setting or
time zone adjust.
≥DST, (Daylight Saving Time) shows the summertime setting.
≥Time Zone shows the time difference from Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).
EST (Eastern Standard Time) l GMT j5
CST (Central Standard Time) l GMT j6
MST (Mountain Standard Time)l GMT j7
PST (Pacific Standard Time) l GMT j8
AST (Alaska Standard Time) l GMT j9
HST (Hawaii Standard Time) l GMT j10
For other areas: xx hr
[8] Press [ENTER].
∫To cancel in the middle
Press [RETURN].
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Clock Settings”.
Adjust the time zone (j1 or i1) if it was not set correctly with auto
clock setting.
You can set this menu only after “Set Clock Automatically” is
completed.
[6] Select “Adjust Time
Zone” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[7] Select “j1” or “i1”
with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Clock Settings
∫ Set Clock Automatically
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
VCR/TV
RETURN
FUNCTIONS
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
CH, W, X
No Disc
FUNCTIONS No Disc
Program
Copy
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
Off Timer
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
Remote Control Code
Clock Settings
6 Hours
Set Code 1
Quick Start
Restore Default Settings
On
Setup
VHS
Set Clock Automatically
Auto Clock Setting is complete.
4/4/2007 11:15 AM
DST------------------
On
Time Zone
---------
CST
∫ Adjust Time Zone
Adjust Time Zone
0
j1
i1
M6VP&PC.book 22 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
23
RQTV0141
Connection (without Audio/Video cable) only
In some cases, interference (lines or patterning) or a very poor
picture may appear on the TV when the DVD Recorder is
connected. If this happens, follow the steps below to change
the video playback channel (RF output channel) to remove the
interference.
[1] Press [FUNCTIONS] for
more than 5 seconds.
The RF output channel number is
displayed on the unit display.
[2] Press [CH,W, X] to
select a channel number
(CH3 or CH4).
The unit’s display
Each time you press the button:
CH 3 (Default setting) (# CH4 (# OFF
^-----------------------------------------------J
≥Set the RF output channel of the DVD Video Recorder to
“OFF” (RF OFF) when the DVD Video Recorder is connected
to the TV via the Audio/Video cable.
[3] Press [ENTER] to finish this setting.
Removing Interference
∫When you set the RF output channel to “CH3” or
“CH4”
A picture is output on CH3 or CH4 from RF output.
Press [VCR/TV] to switch the mode from TV to VCR, and vice
versa.
≥When the TV mode is selected, the “TV” indicator lights on the
unit’s display and you can watch TV.
≥When the “TV” indicator does not light on, then VCR mode is
selected and you can watch images from the unit.
24
RQTV0141
Recording television programs
[1] Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to
open the tray.
≥You can insert a cartridge or non-cartridge disc.
[2] Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to
close the tray.
≥If you insert a DVD-RAM with the write-protect tab set to
“PROTECT” (l60), play starts automatically.
Notes
≥A double-sided disc should be loaded with the side you want to
record/play facing down.
≥It is not possible to record continuously from one side of a double-
sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it
over.
≥When using 8 cm (3q) DVD-RAM or 8 cm (3q) DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
The surface on which
you can see a roll of
tape should face up,
Insert a video
cassette.
≥The unit is
automatically turned
on.
∫To eject a video
cassette
≥You can eject a video cassette even when the unit is in standby
mode. It switches back to standby once it ejects the video
cassette.
For main unit
≥Press [<, EJECT] on the main unit.
For remote control
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select VHS side and then press and
hold [∫, STOP] for about 3 or more seconds.
[+RW]
≥The created title menu is deleted when recording on the disc.
Create the title menu again by using “Create DVD Top Menu” in
DVD Management. (l62)
Inserting discs
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
DRIVE SELECT
REC MODE
Í
∫
µ
;
CH, W, X
STATUS
Numeric
buttons
, OPEN/CLOSE , EJECT
25
RQTV0141
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [VHS]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
≥You can record up to 99 titles on a disc.
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥You can record up to 49 titles on a disc.
≥It is not possible to record digital broadcasts that allow “One time
only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL,
+RW or 8 cm (3q) DVD-RAM discs. Use a CPRM compatible DVD-
RAM.
≥Recording will take place on open space on the disc. Data will not
be overwritten.
≥If there is no space left on the recording disc, you will need to
erase unwanted titles (l41, 59) or use a new disc.
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l60, cartridge l60). [RAM]
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
≥Select an audio type you want to record. (l27)
[1] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on.
[2] Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive you
want to record on (DVD or VHS).
[3] Insert a disc. (l24)
≥When using a DVD-RAM for the first time with the unit, format
it to ensure accurate recording (l61, “Deleting all contents of
a disc or card –Format”).
or
Insert a video cassette with an intact accidental
erasure prevention tab. (l24)
[4] Press [CH, W, X] to select the channel.
≥To select with the numeric buttons:
Antenna Mode (Airwaves)
e.g., “5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
CableTV Mode (Cable)
e.g., “5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
“115”: [1] )[1] )[5]
[5] Press [REC MODE] to select the recording
mode.
[DVD]
XP, SP, LP or EP
[VHS]
SP, EP or VP
[6] Press [¥, REC] to start recording.
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording. You can change them while recording is paused,
but the material is recorded as a separate title.
∫To pause recording
Press [;, PAUSE]. (Press again to restart recording.)
≥Title is not split into separate titles. [DVD]
≥You can also press [¥, REC] to restart recording.
∫To stop recording
Press [∫, STOP].
≥Recorded as 1 title until the position where stopped. [DVD]
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to complete recording
management information after recording finishes.
∫To show the remaining time
[DVD]
Press [STATUS] several times. (l40)
[VHS]
[1] Select “Select Tape Length” from the Setup and select the
corresponding tape length. (l65)
[2] Press [STATUS] several times.
The remaining tape time may not be displayed correctly depending
on the tape used.
Notes
≥Even if the video cassette you use is labeled “S-VHS”, it is not
possible to record in the S-VHS system with the unit. It
records in the normal VHS system. [VHS]
≥When recording is paused for 5 or more minutes, the unit returns
to stop mode. [VHS]
≥The remaining tape time is only displayed during playback or
recording. [VHS]
Recording procedures
When recording to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL or +RW
≥When recording MTS broadcasts
-If you do not connect a cable box
Select “Main” or “SAP” in “Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)” in
the Setup menu (l64).
-If you connect a cable box
Select “Main” or “SAP” on the cable box.
≥The aspect ratio of the recorded image will be 4:3.
≥To play a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R or +R DL recorded using this unit on another playback
source, the disc must first be finalized (l61).
≥[+RW] To enable play on other DVD equipment, please use
“Create DVD Top Menu” in DVD Management menu (l62).
Remaining time on the disc
Recording television programs
M6VP&PC.book 25 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
26
RQTV0141
Recording television programs
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may
become shorter than indicated.
This unit uses variable bit rate (VBR) recording which varies the
amount of data recorded to suit the images, so actual recording
times and remaining recording times shown by the unit will be
different. (The difference will be especially noticeable with DVD-
R DL and +R DL.)
Use a disc with plenty of remaining time to be sure.
°1It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of
a double sided disc to the other.
°2When “Recording Time in EP Mode” has been set to “EP (6H)”
in the Setup menu. (l64)
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6H)” than when
using “EP (8H)”.
°3It is not possible to record continuously from first layer to second
layer.
Note
When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8H) mode, play may not be
possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this
case use EP (6H) mode.
FR (Flexible Recording mode l29):
≥You can set FR mode when transferring (copying) or programming
scheduled recordings.
Note
You cannot play VP recording on other equipment.
∫ Recording modes and approximate
recording times (DVD)
DVD-RAM DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R, +RW
(4.7 GB)
Single-sided
(4.7 GB) Double-sided°1
(9.4 GB)
XP
(High quality)
1 hour 2 hours 1 hour
SP (Normal) 2 hours 4 hours 2 hours
LP
(Long recording)
4 hours 8 hours 4 hours
EP (Extra long
recording)
8 hours
(6 hours°2)
16 hours
(12 hours°2)
8 hours
(6 hours°2)
FR (Flexible
Recording)
8 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
for one side
8 hours
maximum
DVD-R DL, +R DL°3 (8.5 GB)
First layer Second layer
XP
(High quality)
55 minutes 50 minutes
SP (Normal) 1 hour 50 minutes 1 hour 40 minutes
LP
(Long recording)
3 hours 40 minutes 3 hours 20 minutes
EP (Extra long
recording)
7 hours 25 minutes
(5 hours 30 minutes
°2)
6 hours 50 minutes
(5 hours 15 minutes
°2)
FR (Flexible
Recording)
7 hours 25 minutes
maximum
6 hours 50 minutes
maximum
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
DRIVE SELECT
AUDIO
∫
µ
2, 1
ENTER ∫ Recording modes (VHS)
Recording mode
SP: You can record the length shown on the tape.
EP: 3 times the length of SP mode.
VP: 5 times the length of SP mode.
≥To have a longer recording capacity, select “EP” or “VP”.
≥If the image quality is important to you or if you wish to store the
tape for a long period, select “SP”.
≥The unit can play tapes recorded in LP mode on other equipment
(“LP” lights on the unit’s display).
VP mode:
≥A tape recorded in VP mode by the unit cannot be played
back by other VCRs. It is recommended to distinguish it from
other tapes by writing “VP” on the tape label, etc.
≥It takes more time for automatic tracking to work when playing
tapes recorded with VP mode, and it may not work at all with
some tapes. Do tracking manually if this is the case (l38).
EP (6H)°2
EP (8H)
LP
SP
XP
Picture quality
Recording time
M6VP&PC.book 26 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
27
RQTV0141
The unit automatically switches to standby when it has not been
used for about 6 hours.
You can turn this feature off or change the time to 2 hours.
(l63, “Off Timer”)
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
When you insert a new disc and a disc recorded on a computer or
other equipment, a format confirmation screen might be displayed.
Format the disc to use it. However all the recorded contents are
deleted.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥Several steps are necessary to format a disc. Refer to “Deleting all
contents of a disc or card –Format”. (l61)
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
When you press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit while stopped:
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc
for play on other equipment.
When finalizing the disc
Press [¥, REC].
≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to provide the disc with a name or set play menu select,
select “Disc Name” (l60) or “Playback will start with” (l61) in
“DVD Management” before finalizing.
When opening the tray without disc finalization
Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
While recording
[1] Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive you
want to specify the time to stop recording
(DVD or VHS).
[2] Press [¥, REC] to select the recording time.
≥On the main unit, press [¥, REC].
The unit’s display
Each time you press the button:
Counter (Cancel) # OFF 0:30 # OFF 1:00 # OFF 1:30
^------- OFF 4:00 ! OFF 3:00 ! OFF 2:00 !----------}
For your reference
≥This does not work during scheduled recording or Flexible
Recording.
≥Recording stops and the set time is cleared if you press
[∫,STOP].
≥The set time is cleared if you change the recording mode or
channel while recording is paused. [DVD]
[RAM]
Press [AUDIO].
Stereo # SAP Audio # Mono
^-------------------------------------}
≥If you change the sound setting while recording, the recorded
sound will also change.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Select the audio (Main or SAP) in “Multi-channel
TV sound (MTS)” in the Setup menu. (l64)
[VHS]
When a stereo broadcast or SAP broadcast is recorded and played
back on the unit, stereo sound will be automatically selected in the
case of a stereo broadcast and SAP sound will be automatically
selected in the case of a dual-sound broadcast (Mono and SAP or
Stereo and SAP).
≥This function may not work properly if the program is played back
from a mid point. In a case like this, press [AUDIO] and select the
right sound.
≥The function will not work with a cassette which has been recorded
using external equipment.
∫ Off Timer
∫ When the format confirmation screen is
displayed
∫ When remove a recorded disc
To specify a time to stop recording
–One Touch Recording
ENTER
This disc is not formatted properly.
Do you want to format the
disc in DVD Management?
Format
NoYe s
Make compatible for playback on other DVD players ( Finalize )
Finalizing is necessary to enable playback
of the disc on compatible DVD players.
Once finalized, titles cannot be added to the disc.
It will take approximately ٤ minutes. Start ?
Press “REC” to start finalizing.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to postpone
finalizing. The disc can be played only on
this unit. You can Finalize it later.
Selecting audio to record
Stereo: Main audio (stereo). If the broadcast is “Mono_SAP”,
audio will be monaural even if you select Stereo
mode.
SAP
Audio: Secondary audio program (SAP). If recorded in SAP,
main audio is also recorded.
Mono: Main audio (monaural). Select “Mono” if reception is
poor during a stereo broadcast.
Auto Bilingual Choice Function
CH 12
28
RQTV0141
Recording television programs
You can play discs while VHS recording. The recording will not be
affected.
≥DVD playback (l32)
For your reference
≥You cannot record on discs while VHS recording.
You can play tapes while DVD recording. The recording will not be
affected.
≥VHS playback (l37)
For your reference
≥You cannot record on tapes while DVD recording.
Preparation
≥Connection (without Audio/Video cable)
-Make sure that the TV indicator is lit on the unit’s display. If it is
not lit, press [VCR/TV] to light it.
≥Connection (with Audio/Video cable)
-Press [TV/VIDEO] to change the input mode to “TV”.
Press TV’s [CH, W, X] to select the desired TV
channel.
For your reference
≥You can also do this if the unit is making a scheduled recording.
≥The recording is unaffected.
[RAM]
Preparation
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
Hint
≥Sound is not output while fast-forwarding.
You can start play from the beginning of the title while continuing to
record it.
While recording or scheduled recording
Press [1, PLAY].
≥Play starts while recording proceeds.
For your reference
≥Play cannot be started until at least 2 seconds after recording
starts.
You can play a title previously recorded while you are recording
another title.
[1] While recording or scheduled recording
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR]. (l32)
[2] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title and press
[ENTER].
≥ Play starts while recording proceeds.
∫To exit the Direct Navigator screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
For your reference
≥During simultaneous recording and play, you cannot edit or erase
titles with the Direct Navigator or playlists.
≥Even if you start play while the unit is on standby for scheduled
recording, recording starts when the time you set is reached.
Playing DVD while recording VHS
Playing VHS while recording DVD
Watching the TV while recording
29
RQTV0141
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
The unit calculates a recording rate that enables the recording to fit
in the time you set (within the remaining time on the disc) with the
best picture quality.
Preparation
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
≥Select the channel to record.
[1] While stopped
Press [FRec].
[2] Press [2,1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and
press [3,4] to set the recording time.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
≥You cannot record for more than 8 hours.
[3] When you want to start recording
Press [3,4,2,1] to select “Start” and press
[ENTER].
≥Recording starts.
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN].
To stop recording partway
Press [∫, STOP].
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS] several times. (l40)
For your reference
≥During a Flexible Recording, all recording mode indicators light up
on the unit’s display.
≥It is not possible to change the channel or recording mode while
Flexible Recording is paused.
Flexible Recording
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)
Using “FLEXIBLE RECORDING” is convenient in these
kind of situations.
≥When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting
an appropriate recording more difficult
≥When you want to record a long program with the best
picture quality possible
e.g., Recording a 90 minute program to disc
If you select XP mode, the program will not fit one disc.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM 4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
If you select SP mode, the program will fit one disc.
If you select “FLEXIBLE RECORDING” the
program will fit one disc perfectly.
A second disc is necessary for
30 minutes of the program.
However there will be 30 minutes
remaining disc space
Flexible Recording
Start Cancel
Record in FR mode.
Set recording time 1 Hour 23 Min.Max recording time 1 Hour 23 Min.
Maximum recording time
This is the maximum
recording time in FR mode.
Recording television programs
M6VP&PC.book 29 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
30
RQTV0141
Scheduled Recording
∫Scheduled recording automatically starts at the set
time.
≥Scheduled recording can be started whether the unit is turned on
or off. When the unit is turned off, the sound and the video cannot
be outputted to the TV.
∫Scheduled recording for TV programs cannot be
executed on both DVD and VHS at the same time.
Make sure the scheduled recording start times do not overlap on
both DVD and VHS Scheduled Recording List screens.
When the scheduled recording settings overlap:
≥When the start time of both scheduled recordings is the same, the
programme that you register later has priority.
≥If there is a VHS scheduled recording that overlaps a DVD
scheduled recording that is currently being recorded, it may not be
possible to operate the VHS during the overlap.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [VHS]
You can enter up to 16 programs a month in advance.
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l60, cartridge l60) [RAM].
≥Insert a disc (l24) and confirm there is sufficient empty space for
recording on it (l40).
≥Check that the clock is set to the correct time.
≥When connecting a cable box or satellite receiver, select the
channel on the cable box or satellite receiver before scheduled
recording starts.
[1] Press [SCHEDULE].
≥Make sure “New Scheduled Recording” is selected.
[2] Press [ENTER], to move and change the items
using [3, 4, 2, 1].
≥You may use the numeric buttons to enter “Channel”, “Date”,
“On”, and “Off”.
≥Channel (Program Position/TV Station Name)
≥Date
You can also make a daily or weekly program.
Each daily or weekly program is counted as one program.
≥On (start time)/Off (finish time)
The time increases or decreases in 30-minute intervals if you
hold down the button.
≥Drive
You can select DVD or VHS drive.
You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
DVD,.VHS
≥Mode (Recording mode)
You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording
mode.
[DVD] XP,.SP,.LP,.EP,.FR,.XP... (l26)
[VHS] SP,.EP,.VP,.AUTO°,.SP... (l26)
°Auto SP/EP mode (l31)
≥Title Name
Press [2, 1] to select “Title Name” and press [ENTER]
(l58).
[3] Press [ENTER] when you have finished making
changes.
≥“ ” lights on the unit’s display. (l13)
≥“Invalid Entry” is displayed when you enter the wrong item.
Reenter the item.
≥Make sure that the scheduled recording has been
programmed correctly on the SCHEDULE LIST screen (l31).
≥To continue programming:
Select “New Scheduled Recording” and repeat steps 2 to 3.
[4] Press [RETURN].
Notes
≥When the unit is carrying out a scheduled recording, you may
utilize playback.
≥When the disc or video cassette is removed, scheduled recording
standby is cancelled (the “ ” indicator goes out). You can put the
unit back on standby by inserting a recordable disc or video
cassette (the “ ” indicator comes on again).
≥When a video cassette is not inserted or a video cassette with no
accidental erasure prevention tab is inserted, the warning
message appears before the recording starts because scheduled
recording cannot be executed.
≥When recording more than one program in a row, for DVD-RAM
the first few seconds, and for DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R,
+R DL or +RW about the first 30 seconds of all programs from the
second one onwards will not be recorded.
≥Even if you set the Title Name on the scheduled recording screen,
it is not recorded on video cassette.
≥If you set “DST” (Daylight Saving Time) to “ON” when manually
setting the clock (l19), scheduled recording may not work when
summer switches to winter and vice versa.
Cautions for using scheduled recording
on DVD and VHS
Programming scheduled recordings
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
REC MODE
DRIVE
SELECT
∫
RETURN
SCHEDULE
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
CH,
ADD/DLT
Numeric
buttons
Channel
No Date On Check
Off Drive Mode
Schedule
List
DVD
VHS 5/ 5 Fri 6:11 PM
Remain 1:00 XP
:
New Scheduled Recording
01 5/ 6 Sat 6:10 PM 6:30 PM DVD XP OK4
New Scheduled
Recording is
selected.
SCHEDULED
RECORDING
Mode
OffOn
Channel
Date
Title Name
P ENTERt t
: :
DVD
VHS 5/ 5 Fri 6:11 PM
Remain 1:00 XP
:
Drive
M6VP&PC.book 30 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
31
RQTV0141
Preparation
≥Select the drive with the scheduled recording you want to cancel
by pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1] When unit is on
Press [∫, STOP].
≥Confirmation screen appears.
[2] Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and
press [ENTER].
≥Recording stops and the scheduled recording is deleted. (Daily
and weekly schedules remain and scheduled recording will
start as programmed.)
[1] Press [SCHEDULE].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the program and press
[SUB MENU].
[3] Press [3, 4] to select “Schedule set to Off” and
press [ENTER].
≥Cancelled icon is displayed in left column.
≥Be sure to select “Schedule set to On.” in step 3 before the
scheduled time to put the program on recording standby.
Note
≥When a scheduled recording program cannot start (no tape, etc.),
“Schedule set to On.” is cancelled one minute before the start time.
(If a daily or weekly scheduled recording program cannot start, the
following daily or weekly scheduled recording will not be affected.)
[VHS]
[VHS]
If, at the beginning of a scheduled recording, there is not enough
tape remaining to complete the recording, the SP/EP function will
automatically run the tape at EP speed for recording. This ensures
that the entire program will be recorded. If EP mode is not enough to
stretch the remaining tape to fit the whole program you will not be
able to record the whole TV program.
≥It is not possible to automatically activate VP mode.
≥The tape length must be set correctly. (l65)
≥Some tapes may not work correctly.
≥If the recording mode changes from SP to EP during a scheduled
recording, some picture distortion occurs at that point.
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the scheduled
recording list by pressing [SCHEDULE].
[1] Press [SCHEDULE].
Icon explanations (A)
¥:Currently recording
W:Programs are overlapped. Recording of the program with the
later start time starts when the earlier program finishes
recording.
:Scheduled recording standby is cancelled. Recording will not
start at the scheduled time.
n:You stopped a weekly or daily scheduled recording. The icon
disappears when the next scheduled recording starts.
F:The disc was full. (not enough space)
:The TV program may not be recorded due to copy-protect. (disc)
X:Recording stopped (Dirty disc or tape, etc.)
Check (B)
OK: Recordable (disc)
# (Date): The last day of daily or weekly recording. (disc)
!: It may not be possible to record because:
≥the disc is write-protected.
≥
32
RQTV0141
Playing discs
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
[1] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on.
[2] Insert a disc. (l24)
[3] Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
[4] Press [1, PLAY].
≥The disc tray closes and play begins.
(The unit takes some time to read the disc before play starts.)
≥Playback starts from the most recently recorded title.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Playback starts from the beginning of the disc.
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
∫To stop play
Press [∫, STOP].
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [1, PLAY] to restart from this position.
≥Depending on the disc, resume play function may not be effective.
[VCD]
≥The stopped position is cleared when:
-You press [∫, STOP] several times.
-You open the tray.
-You turn the unit off. [DVD-A] [VCD] [CD]
≥The screen saver on the right may appear when
you stop play. Press [∫, STOP] again and you
can use the unit’s tuner to watch TV.
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
∫To pause play
Press [;, PAUSE]. (Press again to restart play.)
Notes
≥The unit stops playing a disc when scheduled recording starts.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Press [1, PLAY] when you wish to start playing the disc while
recording (l28, “Playing from the beginning of the title you are
recording–Chasing playback”). [RAM]
[VCD]
Press the numeric buttons to select an item.
e.g.: “5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select an item and press [ENTER].
≥You can sometimes use the numeric buttons to select an item.
Other buttons used to operate menus
Read the disc’s instructions for further details about operation.
Note
≥ If “ ” appears on the TV, the operation is prohibited by the unit
or disc.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[1] Press [DIRECT
NAVIGATOR].
[2] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to
select the title you
want to watch and
press [ENTER].
≥Play starts.
≥You can also select titles by
entering a 2-digit number with the numeric buttons.
e.g.: “5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
≥[RAM] Press [A] to switch to the Title View screen, when the
Album View screen is displayed.
≥If you enter a number larger than the total number of titles, the
last title is selected.
≥“To show other pages” (l41)
∫To exit the Title View screen
Press [RETURN].
For your reference
≥Direct Navigator screen icons
:Title protected
:Copy-protected so it was not recorded
t:Unable to play
¥:Currently recording
:Title with “One time only recording” restriction (l76, CPRM)
[RAM]
The play speed can be increased without distorting the audio.
During Play
Press and hold [1, PLAY].
∫To return to normal speed
Press [1, PLAY].
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
During Play
Press [6, SLOW/SEARCH] or
[5, SLOW/SEARCH].
≥There are 5 search speeds. Each press
increases the search speed. ([+R] [+RW] Up to 3 speeds)
≥Press [1, PLAY] to restart playback.
For your reference
≥Sound is output only in the first level of fast forward. In the case of
DVD-Audio (except motion picture parts), CD and MP3, it is output
in all levels.
≥Depending on the disc, search may not be possible.
Preparation
≥Turn on the TV and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to the unit.
Playing discs
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
33
RQTV0141
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
During play or while paused
Press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP].
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only) [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
While paused
Press [6, SLOW/SEARCH] or
[5, SLOW/SEARCH].
≥When slow motion play is continued for about 5 minutes it pauses
automatically (excluding [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD]).
≥There are 5 play speeds. Each press increases the play speed.
≥Press [1, PLAY] to restart playback.
≥[VCD] Forward direction ([5, SLOW/SEARCH]) only.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only) [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
While paused
Press [2;] ([2]) or [;1] ([1]).
≥Each press shows the next or previous frame.
≥Press and hold to change in succession forward or backward.
≥Press [1, PLAY] to restart playback.
≥[VCD] Forward direction ([;1], [1]) only.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
You can play from the title, chapter or track you select.
During Play
Press the numeric buttons to select an item.
[CD] (MP3, JPEG and TIFF disc only)
e.g.: “5”: [0] )[5] “5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5] “15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
[DVD-A]
A group number can be specified while the screen saver (l32) is
displayed.
e.g.: “5”: [5]
≥This works only when stopped (screen saver is displayed) with
some discs.
≥Playing bonus groups
Some discs contain bonus groups. If a password screen appears
after selecting a group, enter the password with the numeric
buttons and press [ENTER]. For the password, refer to the disc’s
jacket, etc.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
You can skip approximately 1 minute with one press.
During play
Press [CM SKIP].
[RAM]
During play
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
≥
Press [
:
, SKIP] or [
9
, SKIP] to skip to the start of a chapter.
≥You cannot activate this function when you are carrying out
transfer (copy).
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[1] During play
Press [TIME SLIP].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the time and press
[ENTER].
Play skip to the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4] the time increases [3] or decreases
[4] by 1 minute intervals. (Press and hold for 10-minute intervals.)
Press [AUDIO] to select the audio type.
≥You can select audio types depend on the recording medium.
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Stereo # Mono L # Mono R
^--------------------------------------}
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [When playing an SAP broadcast recorded on DVD-
RAM, DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format)]
MAIN Audio () SAP Audio
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
This allows you to change items like the audio channel number and
the sound track language.
(l39)
e.g.: English is the selected language. [DVD-V]
[VHS]
Stereo > Mono L > Mono R > No display (Normal audio track)
^------------------------------------------------------------}
Note
≥If you cannot change the audio type when you have used only an
optical digital cable for connection, set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM”
(l64). Alternatively, you may connect to an amplifier with an
Audio/Video cable and change the input on the amplifier to suit the
connection.
Skipping
Slow-motion play
Frame-by-frame viewing
Direct play
CM Skip
Create chapters
Skipping the specified time — Time Slip
Changing audio during play
Play
Stereo
DVD-RAM
e.g.: [RAM]
“Stereo” is
selected.
Soundtrack 1 ENG Î Digital 3/2.1ch
Playing discs
M6VP&PC.book 33 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
34
RQTV0141
Using menus to play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
2
[CD]
The screen shown below is displayed when you insert a disc
containing MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF).
Press [ENTER].
∫To play MP3
Refer to “Playing MP3”. (l below)
∫To play still pictures
Refer to “To show Pictures Menu”. (l35)
[CD]
The unit plays MP3 files recorded on CD-R/RW designed for audio
recording that are finalized (l76) on a computer. Files are treated
as tracks and folders are treated as groups.
[1] During stop or play
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥The file list appears.
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the track and press
[ENTER].
≥Play starts on the selected track.
≥“ ” indicates the track currently playing.
≥You can also directly select the track with the numeric buttons.
e.g.:
“6”: [0] )[0] )[6]
“10”: [0] )[1] )[0]
∫Using the tree screen to find a group (l right)
∫To show other groups
Press [:] (Prev.) or [9] (Next) to show other pages.
≥After listing all the tracks in one group, the list for the next group
appears.
∫To exit the file list
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] or [RETURN].
[1] While the file list is displayed (l left)
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
≥A folder which has no MP3 files is indicated in black. You
cannot select groups with no MP3 files.
≥Press [2, 1] to jump layers in the tree screen.
[2] Press [3, 4] to select a group and press
[ENTER].
≥The file list for the selected group appears.
∫To return to the file list
Press [RETURN].
Preparation
≥Turn on the TV and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to the unit.
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
Playing discs which contain both MP3
and still pictures
Playing MP3
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
DRIVE
SELECT
∫
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
SUB MENU
BRETURN
FUNCTIONS
:, 9
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
Numeric
buttons
Playback mode is set to MP3.
To display pictures,
please select Pictures Menu from FUNCTIONS.
ENTER
Menu
0 – 9
No.
Prev.
Next
No. Group
Total Track Tree
1
: MP3_MUSIC
Page 001/016
G 1
T 1
Total
1/ 24 1
001 Both Ends Freezing
ENTER
G:
The Group Number
T:
Track Number in the Group
Total:
Selected Track Number/
Total Track Number
Selected Group No. and Name
Regarding MP3
≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats) and Joliet
≥Maximum number of files (tracks) and folders (groups)
recognizable: 999 files° (tracks) and 99 (including the root
folder) folders (groups)
°Total number for all the MP3, JPEG and other types of files
≥This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of
the disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some files (tracks) may not
display or be playable.
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you
numbered them.
≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
≥Depending on the recording, some items may not be playable.
≥File format: MP3
Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
≥Bit rates: 32 kbps to 320 kbps
≥Sampling frequency: 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/
44.1 kHz/48 kHz
≥This unit is not compatible with ID3 tags.
≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3
file, play may not be possible.
≥You can play MP3 on this unit by making folders as shown below.
However depending on how you create the disc (writing
software), play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.
≥English alphabetical characters and Arabic numerals are
displayed correctly. Other characters may not be displayed
correctly.
≥When the highest level folders are “DCIM” folders, they are
displayed first on the tree.
∫ Using the tree screen to find a group
001 001 Group
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
002 Group
001 Group
003 Group
Tree
Order of play
Structure of MP3 folders
Prefix with 3-digit numbers
in the order you want to play
them.
Menu
0 – 9
No.
G 1
T 1
Total
1/ 24
3
3
MP3_MUSIC
001 My favorite
001 Brazillian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 PC Files
005 Japanese pops
006 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
002 Standard Number
001 Piano solo
002 Vocal
G 1/ 15
Tree
ENTER
Selected Group Number/Total
Group Number
≥If the group has no track, “– –”
is displayed as group number.
M6VP&PC.book 34 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
35
RQTV0141
[1] Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Menu” with [3,
4] and press [ENTER].
[3] Select “Pictures” with
[3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
∫To show other pages
Press [:] (Previous) or [9]
(Next) to show other pages.
≥
You can also press [
3
,
4
,
2
,
1
] to
select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER] to show other pages.
∫To exit the Pictures Menu
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] or
[RETURN].
[RAM]
36
RQTV0141
Using menus to play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
[CD]
[1] While the Picture View screen
is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to
select “Folder” and
press [ENTER].
ASelected folder no./Total folder
no.
BYou cannot select folders that
contain no compatible files.
[2]
Press [
3
,
4
] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
You can display still pictures one by one with constant interval.
[RAM] [SD]
[1] While the Album View screen is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album and press [SUB MENU].
≥You can start slideshow quickly by pressing [1, PLAY].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow” and
press [ENTER].
[CD]
[1] While the Picture View screen is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press
[SUBMENU].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow” and
press [ENTER].
∫To change the display timing
[1] Select “Slideshow settings” with [3, 4] in step 2 above and
press [ENTER].
[2] Press [2, 1] to select the desired timing (0 to 30 seconds) and
press [ENTER].
∫To repeat play
[1] Select “Slideshow settings” with [3, 4] in step 2 of “Start
Slideshow/Slideshow settings” and press [ENTER].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play” .
[3] Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [ENTER].
[RAM] [SD] [CD]
[1] While playing
Press [SUB MENU].
[2] Select “Rotate Right” or “Rotate
Left” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
∫To return the rotated picture to its original position
Press [
3
,
4
] to select the opposite rotation in step 2 and press [ENTER].
For your reference
≥Rotation information will not be stored;
-[CD] When Still pictures
-When disc is protected
-When played on other equipment
-When copying pictures
[RAM] [SD] [CD]
[1] While playing
Press [SUB MENU].
[2] Select “Zoom in” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
∫To return the picture to its original size
Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press [ENTER].
For your reference
≥When zooming in, the still picture may be cut off.
≥The enlargement information will not be stored.
≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures
smaller than 640k480 pixels.
[RAM] [SD]
≥Once erased, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
[1] While playing
Press [DELETE].
[2] Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press
[ENTER].
While playing
Press [STATUS]
twice.
≥Press [STATUS]
again, the properties
disappear.
∫ Start Slideshow/Slideshow settings
∫ To rotate a still picture
∫ To zoom in/out
37
RQTV0141
Playing a video cassette
[1] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on.
[2] Select VHS side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[3] Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. the AV
input) on the TV.
[4] Insert a recorded video cassette. (l24)
[5] Press [1, PLAY].
≥Play starts automatically if you insert a video cassette with the
tab removed.
∫To pause play
Press [;, PAUSE]. (Press again to restart play.)
∫To stop play
Press [∫, STOP].
Notes
≥When the unit is on standby, an inserted video cassette can be
played back by pressing [1, PLAY].
≥When the tape reaches its end, the unit automatically rewinds it to
the beginning. This function does not work during scheduled
recording, fast-forwarding and specified stop recording.
≥Jet Search, cue, review or slow playback will be automatically
canceled after 10 minutes, and pause after 5 minutes.
≥When viewing a still picture or during slow playback, the picture
that appears in VP mode may be distorted.
≥When playing back a tape which was recorded on another VCR, it
may be necessary to adjust the tracking (l38). In some cases the
picture quality may still be inferior. This is due to format
constraints.
While stopped
Press [6] (backward)/[5] (forward).
During play
Tap or keep pressing [6] (backward)/[5]
(forward).
≥If you keep pressing these buttons, normal playback restarts by
releasing them.
≥Tap [1, PLAY] to restart normal playback.
During play
Tap [6] (backward)/[5] (forward) twice. You can
increase Cue/Review search speed.
≥Press [1, PLAY] to restart normal playback.
≥You can select search speed to view the recorded picture. (l65)
≥The picture recorded in EP or VP mode may be distorted if it is
played at approx. 35 times speed. A vertical scroll may occur. It is
not a malfunction but if it happens, change to approx. 27 times
speed.
≥The picture may not be in color or may be distorted depending on
the TV.
During play
Press and hold [;, PAUSE] for about 2 seconds or
more.
≥Press [1, PLAY] to restart normal playback.
To perform a Higher Speed Rewind
Press [6JET REW].
≥Depending on the tape or an operating condition, the rewind speed
may change somewhat.
≥The tape counter is reset to “0:00.00” when the tape is rewound to
the beginning.
≥Depending on the tape, this function may not work.
It is also possible to play back tapes recorded in the S-VHS system.
≥Some picture noise may occur depending on the type of tape used.
≥It is not possible to fully obtain the high resolution that S-VHS is
capable of.
≥It is not possible to record in the S-VHS system with the unit.
During play or while stopped
Keep pressing [1, PLAY] for about 5 or more
seconds.
≥At the end of the program, the tape rewinds to the beginning of the
program and plays it again (it only works if there is at least
5 seconds blank space at the end of the program). This repeats
until you cancel it.
∫ To restart normal playback
Press [1, PLAY].
∫To stop play
Press [∫, STOP].
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
DRIVE
SELECT
Í
6JET REW
SUB MENU
∫1
6, 5
STATUS
DELETE
;
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
Fast-forward/Rewind
Cue/Review
Jet Search
Slow
Jet Rewind
S-VHS Quasi Playback (SQPB)
Repeat Playback
Using menus to play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)/Playing a video cassette
M6VP&PC.book 37 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
38
RQTV0141
Playing a video cassette
The unit usually makes tracking adjustments, but you may need to
do it manually if noise appears on a tape recorded on other
equipment.
During play
Press [TRACKING/V-LOCK, r] or
[TRACKING/V-LOCK, s].
Repeat until the noise disappears.
Adjust the vertical synchronization to stop the picture from jiggling
while paused.
While paused
Press [TRACKING/V-LOCK, r] or
[TRACKING/V-LOCK, s].
Repeat until the jiggling stops.
∫To return to auto tracking
Press both [TRACKING/V-LOCK, r] and [TRACKING/V-LOCK, s]
simultaneously.
∫To remove the noise from a paused picture
Start slow play, then adjust the tracking.
Notes
≥This function may not work with some TV models and tapes.
≥You can also adjust the tracking and vertical synchronization with
[CH, W, X] on the main unit.
The unit automatically records special index signals on the tape
every time a recording is started. The index search function makes
use of these index signals to let you find the beginning of a desired
program quickly and easily.
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel on the TV.
≥Select VHS side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
≥Insert a recorded video cassette.
While stopped or during normal play
Press [: ] or [ 9].
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
∫To cancel the index search
Press [∫, STOP].
Notes
≥You can search up to 20 index signals can be searched for in both
directions.
≥When you press either one of the buttons too much, you can
control the number of skips by pressing the opposite button.
≥The figure on the display decreases by 1 each time an index signal
is located.
≥This feature may not work correctly if the index signals are too
close together. Make recordings of at least 5 minutes.
On-screen display below appears during play on VHS.
To see these displays, set the “Status Messages” item in the “Setup”
to “Automatic”. (l65)
Press [STATUS].
The time and operation details appear on the screen.
Note
≥The on-screen display may be distorted depending on the
playback tape or the input signal.
Adjusting the playback picture
∫ Manual tracking
∫ Vertical locking adjustment
VHS Index Search System (VISS)
∫Index signals are recorded in the following cases.
≥When a recording is started by pressing [¥, REC].
≥When scheduled recording is started.
Various on-screen display indications
1Current drive
2Audio indicators
The Left (Mono L) and Right (Mono R) indicators show
which sound mode is selected as follows:
Stereo: Stereo indicator appears.
Mono L: The Mono L indicator appears.
Mono R: The Mono R indicator appears.
Normal: Neither the L nor R indicator appears.
3Operation status display
4Shows the tape counter and remaining tape time
Pressing [STATUS] once makes the on-screen display
appear. After that, press the button repeatedly to change
the display as follows:
No display > Tape counter > Remaining tape time
^-----------------------------------------------------------------}
≥Press [¢, CANCEL] to reset the tape counter (elapsed
time) to “0:00.00”. The tape counter is automatically reset
to “0:00.00” when inserting a video cassette.
≥The remaining time is approximate. It will be incorrect if
you set the wrong tape time in “Select Tape Length” in the
“Setup” and if the tape is of poor quality. (l65)
5Cassette-in indicator
Shows whether you have inserted a video cassette.
6Recording mode indicator (l26)
VHS
Mono L 0:00.22
SP 1
12 4
5
6
39
RQTV0141
Using on-screen menus/FUNCTIONS window and Status messages
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
Preparation
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1] Press [DISPLAY].
[2] Select a menu with [3, 4] and press [1].
[3] Select an item with [3, 4] and press [1].
[4] Select a setting with [3, 4].
≥Different operations are required depending on settings.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
∫To exit the screen
Press [DISPLAY].
For your reference
≥The screens depend on the disc contents.
≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped, etc.) and
the type of software you are playing, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[VCD]
Soundtrack
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear.
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Select the audio and language. (See [B] Audio attributes)
Subtitle
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (See [A] Sound
track/Subtitle language)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(Only disc that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
≥If the subtitles overlap the closed captions recorded on discs,
turn the subtitles off.
Audio channel [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
“Changing audio during play” (l33)
Angle [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Change the number to select an angle.
Still-P (Still picture) [DVD-A]
Selects the play method for still pictures.
Slide Show: Plays according to the default order on the disc.
Page: Select the still picture number and play.
RANDOM: Plays in random order.
Return: Returns to the default still picture on the disc.
PBC (Playback control) [VCD] (l76)
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
[A] Sound track/Subtitle language
[B] Audio attributes
LPCM/PPCM/Î Digital/DTS/MPEG: Signal type
k (kHz): Sampling frequency
b (bit): Number of bits
ch (channel): Number of channels
For your reference
≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
make a change when there is no recording.
≥Some discs allow changes to sound tracks, subtitles, and angles
only by using the disc’s setup menus.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[VCD] [CD]
Repeat play
This function works only when the elapsed play time is
displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items
that can be selected will differ.
≥All [VCD] [CD] (excluding MP3 discs)
≥Chapter [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Group [DVD-A] [CD] (MP3 discs only)
≥Playlists [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Title [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Track [DVD-A] [VCD] [CD]
Select “Off” to cancel.
Using on-screen menus
∫ Common procedures
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
3, 4, 1
DRIVE
SELECT
∫
µ
DISPLAY STATUS
:, 9
TRACKING/
V-LOCK, r, s
Disc
Video
Audio
Other
Play Soundtrack
Subtitle
Audio channel Off
1Î Digital 2/0ch
Stereo
ItemMenu Setting
1Disc menu-Setting disc content
ENG:
FRA:
DEU:
ITA:
ESP:
NLD:
SVE:
NOR:
English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Dutch
Swedish
Norwegian
DAN:
POR:
RUS:
JPN:
CHI:
KOR:
MAL:
VIE:
Danish
Portuguese
Russian
Japanese
Chinese
Korean
Malay
Vietnamese
THA:
POL:
CES:
SLK:
HUN:
FIN:
¢:
Thai
Polish
Czech
Slovak
Hungarian
Finnish
Others
1Play menu-Change play sequence
Playing a video cassette/Using on-screen menus/FUNCTIONS window and Status messages
M6VP&PC.book 39 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
40
RQTV0141
Using on-screen menus/FUNCTIONS window and Status messages
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[VCD]
Picture
To select the picture mode during play
Normal: Default setting
Soft: Soft picture with fewer video artifacts
Fine: Details are sharper
Cinema:Mellows movies, enhances detail in dark scenes.
DNR
Reduces noise and picture degradation.
On()Off
°Progressive (l76)
Select “On” to enable progressive output.
≥Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.
≥When progressive output is on, closed captions cannot be
displayed.
On()Off
°Transfer (When “Progressive” is set to “On”)
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of material being played (l76, “Film and Video”).
Auto1 (normal):
Detects 24 frame-per-second film content and
appropriately converts it.
Auto2: Compatible with 30 frame-per-second film content in
addition to 24 frame-per-second film content.
Video: Select when the video content is distorted by using
Auto1 and Auto2.
Line-in NR (Only when IN1, IN2 or DV is selected)
Reduces video tape noise during transfer (copy).
Depending on the software, jittering may occur.
Automatic:
Noise reduction only works on picture input from a
video tape.
On: Noise reduction works for any video input.
Off: Noise reduction is off. Select when you want to record
input as is.
°Only when you have selected “480p” in “TV Type” (l20).
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
V. Surround Sound
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
(Only for Dolby Digital with 2.0 or more channels)
Enjoy a surround-sound effect if you are using 2 front speakers
(L/R) only.
Natural()Emphasis()Off
^----------------------------------------J
Notes
≥Turn V. Surround Sound off if it causes distortion.
≥V. Surround Sound does not work for SAP recordings.
Dialog Enhancer
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a center
channel)
The volume of the center channel is raised to make dialog easier
to hear.
On()Off
Position
To change the display position
1 (Standard) –5:
The higher the setting the lower the screen moves.
By using the FUNCTIONS window you can access the main
functions quickly and easily.
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
≥Functions displayed depend
on the type of disc.
[2] Select an item with
[3,4] and press
[ENTER].
≥If you select “Other
Functions”, press [3, 4] to select an item and press [ENTER].
∫To exit the FUNCTIONS window
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Status messages appear on the TV when operating the unit, to show
you what operation was performed and what condition the unit is in.
Press [STATUS] to change the information
displayed.
The display changes each time you press the button.
For example,
∫Display examples
(1) Current medium
(2) Current recording or play status, input channel
≥Shows the current state of the unit and the input channel.
(3) Audio type (l27, 33)
(4) Other drive mode
(5) The current date and time
(6) Available recording time and recording mode
(e.g.: “1:34 SP” indicates 1 hour and 34 minutes in SP mode)
≥Disc remaining time may slightly differ between different
models.
(7) Elapsed play time
(8) Recording time
≥Shows recording time, recording mode and a rough guide to
how much space has been used for recording on the disc.
1Video menu-Change picture quality
1Audio menu-Change sound effect
1Other menu-Change the display position
FUNCTIONS window
Status messages
No Disc
FUNCTIONS No Disc
Program
Copy
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
1:34 SP 5/22 10:15 PM
T1 00:05.14 XP T2 00:00.10 SP
Remain
π
ππ
Play
Rec.
Stereo
DVD-RAM
(6)
(7) (8)
(5)
Play
Rec.
Stereo
DVD-RAM
(1)
(2)
(3)
VHS Rec.
(4)
VHS Rec.
No display
M6VP&PC.book 40 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
41
RQTV0141
Editing titles/chapters
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] and the list of titles recorded (Title
View) is shown. You can play and edit a desired title.
For your reference
≥You cannot edit during recording or transferring (copying), etc.
≥You can create a Top Menu using “Create DVD Top Menu” (l62).
Recording or editing on the disc may delete the menu. In that case,
create the menu again. [+RW]
≥Management information is recorded in unused sections when you
edit discs. The available space these discs decreases each time
you edit their contents. [+R] [+R]DL]
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
-Title: 99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)
-Chapter: Approximately 1000
([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approximately 254)
(Depends on the state of recording.)
Note
≥Once deleted, divided or shortened, the title cannot be restored to
its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l60, cartridge l60). [RAM]
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
[1] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[2] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
desired title.
≥“To show other pages” (l below)
[3] Press [SUB MENU].
[4] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item
and press [ENTER].
≥After this operation, follow the desired operation.
∫To stop in the middle
Press [RETURN].
For your reference
≥When the title is protected (l42), some items are not accessible.
Release the protection to access the inaccessible items. [RAM]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(Multiple editing is possible. l below)
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Editing titles/Chapters and playing
chapters”.
Once title is deleted using this
procedure, it cannot be retrieved.
Check the title carefully before
erasing to ensure it isn’t the one you
want to keep.
[4] Select “Delete Title”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Select “Delete” with [2] and press [ENTER].
For your reference
≥The disc’s available recording time may not increase after erasing
short titles.
≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL
does not increase when you delete titles.
≥
The available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or
+RW increases when the last recorded title is deleted. (The
recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted.)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Editing titles/Chapters and playing
chapters”.
Title information (e.g., date and
time) is shown.
[4] Select “Properties”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Editing titles/Chapters and playing
chapters”.
[4] Select “Album View” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
≥Album View screen is displayed.
[“Playing still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)” l35]
Various operations
∫To show other pages
Press [
3
,
4
,
2
,
1
] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [ENTER].
≥
You can also press [
:
, SKIP] or [
9
, SKIP] to show other pages.
∫Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;, PAUSE]. (Repeat)
A check mark appears. Press [;, PAUSE] again to cancel.
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
DRIVE
SELECT
SUB MENU
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR RETURN
FUNCTIONS
STATUS
:, 9
;
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
Title/Chapter
Programs are recorded as a single title consisting of one chapter.
Title
Chapter
You can divide a title into multiple chapters. [RAM]
(l33, “Create chapters”, l43 “Create Chapter”)
Title
Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter
≥You can change the order of chapters and create a playlist
(l44). [RAM]
≥Titles are divided into chapters about 5 minutes after finalizing
(l61). [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] (8 minutes [+R] [+R]DL])
Start End
Editing titles/Chapters and playing
chapters
Title operations
∫ Delete Title
∫ Properties
∫ Album View
Properties
Edit Title
View Chapters
Album View
Delete Title
e.g.; [RAM]
Delete Title
Delete Cancel
0 : 58(SP)
Corresponding playlist's chapters will be deleted.
Time remaining
after deletion
ENTER
Date 10/23/2007 Mon
Channel 12 Start 12:00 AM
Number 01
Date 1/ 1/2007 Mon
Channel 12 Start 1:02 PM
Rec. Length 1:00(SP)
Football
Properties
ENTER
Using on-screen menus/FUNCTIONS window and Status messages/Editing titles/chapters
e.g.; [RAM]
M6VP&PC.book 41 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
42
RQTV0141
Editing titles/chapters
You can perform various kinds of title editing.
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l60, cartridge l60). [RAM]
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] and use [3, 4, 2,
1] to select a desired title.
≥“To show other pages” l41
≥“Multiple editing” l41
[2] Press [SUB MENU].
[3] Select “Edit Title” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[4] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item
and press [ENTER].
≥The editing screen for the selected item
appears.
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.
[4] Select “Title Name” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
≥Refer to “Entering text”. (l58)
[RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] (“Multiple editing” l41)
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.
You can prevent accidental erasure of titles by setting and canceling
the write-protection.
[4] Select “Set Protection” or “Cancel Protection”
with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
For your reference
Titles will be erased even if they are protected if you format the disc
with DVD Management (l60).
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.
You can remove unnecessary parts of the title such as commercials.
[4] Select “Shorten Title”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Press [ENTER] at the
start point and end
point of the section
you want to erase.
(l43, “For quicker editing”)
[6] Select “Exit” with [3,
4] and press [ENTER].
[7] Select “Delete” with
[2] and press
[ENTER].
∫To erase another part of the same title
After setting the point in “Start” and “End”, select “Next” in step 5 and
perform step 7, then repeat steps 5 to 7.
For your reference
≥You may not be able to specify start and end points within
3 seconds of each other.
≥The disc’s available recording time may not increase after erasing
short parts of titles.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.
You can change the image to be shown as a thumbnail picture in the
Title View.
[4] Select “Change
Thumbnail” with [3,4]
and press [ENTER].
[5] Press [1, PLAY] to
play.
[6] Press [ENTER] at the
point you want to
display.
(l43, “For quicker editing”)
≥To change to another point in the same title:
- Select “Change” with [3, 4] and press [1, PLAY] and then
repeat step 6.
[7] Select “Exit” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
≥The thumbnail picture will be changed at this point.
∫ Edit Title
1Title Name
1Set Protection/Cancel Protection
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
SUB MENU
DRIVE
SELECT
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR RETURN
1
:, 9
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
Set Protection
Cancel Protection
Shorten Title
Change Thumbnail
Divide Title
Title Name
e.g.; [RAM]
1Shorten Title
1Change Thumbnail
Cancel Protection:
The padlock mark
disappears.
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
DVD-RAM
--
07
10 10/23 Mon
Set Protection
Set title protection.
Yes No
ENTER
07
Set up Protection:
The padlock mark
appears.
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
DVD-RAM
--
07
10 10/23 Mon
Cancel Protection
Cancel title protection.
Yes No
ENTER
07
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Shorten Title
DVD-RAM Start
Next
Exit
0:43.21
Play
08
End
- -:- -.- - - -:- -.- -
Start End
ENTER
PictureVideo
Shorten Title
Delete Cancel
1 : 57(SP)
Corresponding playlist's chapters will be deleted.
Time remaining
after deletion
Date 5/ 22/2006 Mon
Channel 12 Start 12:00 AM
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail
DVD-RAM Change
Exit
0:00.00
0:00.00
Change
08
;
ENTER
Start play and select
the thumbnail position.
PictureVideo
M6VP&PC.book 42 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
43
RQTV0141
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.
You can divide a selected title into two. You must be careful when
dividing a title because it cannot be recovered after the procedure.
[4] Select “Divide Title”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Press [ENTER] at the
point you want to
divide the title.
(l lower right, “For quicker
editing”)
≥To change the point to
divide:
- Select “Divide” with [3, 4]
and press [1, PLAY], and
then repeat steps 5 to 7.
[6] Select “Exit” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[7] Select “Divide” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥The title is divided at that point.
∫To check the division point
By selecting “Preview” in step 5 and pressing [ENTER], play will
begin from 10 seconds prior to the division point to 10 seconds after
the division point.
For your reference
≥The divided titles retain the name of the original title. They also
retain the CPRM property (l76) of the original.
≥Video and audio just before and after the division point will be
momentarily cut out.
≥It is not possible to carry out “Divide” in the following cases:
-When the resulting part(s) are extremely short.
-When the total number of titles is more than 99.
[1] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] and use [3, 4, 2,
1] to select a desired title.
≥“To show other pages” l41
[2] Press [SUB MENU].
[3] Select “View Chapters” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[4] Select a desired chapter with
[3, 4, 2, 1].
≥To start play l Press [ENTER].
≥To edit l Follow the steps below.
[5] Press [SUB MENU].
[6] Select a desired item with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[RAM] (“Multiple editing” l41)
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “View Chapters”.
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
[6] Select “Delete Chapter” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[7] Select “Delete” with [2] and press [ENTER].
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “View Chapters”.
[6] Select “Create Chapter” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[7] Press [ENTER] at the point you want to divide.
(lbelow, “For quicker editing”)
≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.
[8] Select “Exit” with [4] and press [ENTER].
Note
≥A short portion of the recording just after the creation point may be
lost.
For your reference
≥The divided titles retain the name of the original title. They also
retain the CPRM property (l76) of the original.
≥It is not possible to carry out “Create” when the resulting part(s) are
extremely short.
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “View Chapters”.
[6] Select “Combine Chapters” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[7] Select “Combine” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥The selected chapter and next chapter are combined.
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “View Chapters”.
[6] Select “View Titles” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
You go back to Title View.
1Divide Title
Chapter operations
∫ View Chapters
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title
DVD-RAM Preview
Divide
Exit
0:00.05
0:00.05
Divide
08
;
ENTER
PictureVideo
Divide Title
Divide Cancel
Once divided, this title
cannot be recombined.
Date 5/ 22/2006 Mon
Channel 12 Start 12:00 AM
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
View Titles
Delete Chapter
e.g.:
[RAM]
1Delete Chapter
1Create Chapter
1Combine Chapters
1View Titles
For quicker editing
≥
44
RQTV0141
Creating, editing and playing playlist
[RAM]
You can create a playlist by gathering your favorite chapters (l41)
from your recordings. You can also play and edit the created playlist.
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
-Playlists: 99
-Chapters in play lists:
Approximately 1000 (Depends on the state of recording.)
≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the
items entered will not be recorded.
≥You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording.
[RAM]
Preparation
≥Release protection. (disc l60, cartridge l60)
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other
Functions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[3] Select “Playlists” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
≥The Playlist View appears.
[4] Select “Create” with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Use [2, 1] to select the source title and press
[4].
≥When you want to select all chapters in the title, use [2, 1] to
select the source title and press [ENTER], then skip to step 7.
≥Repeat steps 5 to 7 to add other titles or chapters.
[6] Use [2, 1] to select the chapter you want to add
to a playlist and press [ENTER].
≥Press [3] to cancel.
≥You can also create a new chapter in the source title.
Press [SUB MENU] to select “Create Chapter” and press
[ENTER] (l43, “Create Chapter”).
[7] Use [2, 1] to select the position to insert the
chapter and press [ENTER].
≥The chapter is registered in the playlist.
≥Repeat steps 6 to 7 to add other chapters.
≥To select other source titles, press [3] several times to return
to step 5.
[8] Press [RETURN].
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] (Play only)
Preparation
≥Create playlists.
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Playlists” with [3,4] and press
[ENTER].
Playlist
≥Editing playlists doesn’t modify titles.
≥Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much
capacity.
Creating playlists
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
SUB MENU
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
∫
DRIVE
SELECT
RETURN
DELETE
FUNCTIONS
Numeric
buttons
Title Title
Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter
Chapter ChapterPlaylist
FUNCTIONS
DVD-RAM
Program
Playback
Copy
Delete
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
45
RQTV0141
[4] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a playlist and press
[ENTER].
≥Chapters are not displayed if you have not yet created a
playlist with the disc.
≥You can also select a playlist from the Playlist View by entering
a 2-digit number with the numeric buttons.
e.g.: “5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
≥If you enter a number larger than the total number of playlists,
“Create” is selected.
≥“To show other pages” l41
∫To stop playlist play
Press [∫, STOP]. (The Playlist View screen appears.)
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
∫To delete a playlist during play
[1] Press [DELETE].
≥A confirmation message will be displayed.
[2] Use [2] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
For your reference
≥You can use fast-forward, fast-rewind, pause, and slow-motion
while playing chapters just as you can during normal play.
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] (Properties only)
Preparation
≥Create playlists. (l44)
≥Release protection (disc l60, cartridge l60). [RAM]
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Playlists” with [3,4] and press
[ENTER].
≥Chapters are not displayed if you have not yet created a
playlist on the disc.
[4] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a playlist.
≥“To show other pages” l41
[5] Press [SUB MENU].
[6] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item
and press [ENTER].
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
[RAM] (“Multiple editing” l41)
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Editing playlists/chapters”.
[6] Select “Delete Playlist”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[7] Select “Delete” with
[2] and press
[ENTER].
≥The playlist is deleted.
≥Once a playlist has been deleted, it cannot be restored. Check
carefully before proceeding.
≥Even if you delete the playlist, the original title is not deleted.
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Editing playlists/chapters”.
[6] Select “Properties” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Playlist information (e.g., date and length) is shown.
[RAM]
You can perform various kinds of playlist editing.
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Playlists” with [3,4] and press
[ENTER].
[4] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a playlist.
≥“To show other pages” l41
[5] Press [SUB MENU],
then select “Edit”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[6] Use [3, 4] to select a
desired item and
press [ENTER].
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Edit”.
[6] Select “Create” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
Refer to “Creating playlists”, steps 5–8. (l44)
“
(“Multiple editing” l41)
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Edit”.
[6] Select “Copy” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[7] Select “Copy” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Edit”.
[6] Select “Playlist Name” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Refer to “Entering text”. (l58)
Editing playlists/chapters
Playlist operations
∫ Delete Playlist
Properties
Edit
View Chapters
Delete Playlist
e.g.:
[RAM]
Delete Playlist
Delete Cancel
Delete playlist ?
ENTER
∫ Properties
∫ Edit
1Create
1Copy
1Playlist Name
Number 03
Chapters: 004 Date: 5/23/2006 Tue
Length: 0:05.51
Dinosaur
Properties
ENTER
Copy
Playlist Name
Change Thumbnail
Create
Properties
Edit
View Chapters
Delete Playlist
e.g.:
[RAM]
Copy
Copy Cancel
Copy this playlist?
ENTER
Creating, editing and playing playlist
M6VP&PC.book 45 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
46
RQTV0141
Creating, editing and playing playlist
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Edit”.
You can change the image to be shown as a thumbnail picture in the
Playlist View.
[6] Select “Change
Thumbnail” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[7] Press [1, PLAY] to play.
[8]
Press [ENTER]
at the
point you want to display.
(l43, “For quicker editing”)
≥To change to another point in the same title:
- Select “Change” with [3, 4] and press [1, PLAY], and then
repeat step 8.
[9] Select “Exit” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
≥The displayed scene is changed at this point.
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] (Play only)
You can play/edit the chapters in a playlist.
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Playlists” with [3,4] and press
[ENTER].
[4] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a playlist.
≥“To show other pages” l41
[5] Press [SUB MENU], and select “View Chapters”
with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[6] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a desired chapter.
≥You can also select a chapter from the chapter view by
entering a 3-digit number with the numeric buttons.
e.g.: “5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
≥If you enter a number larger than the total
number of chapters, the last chapter is
selected.
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify
the source titles and source chapters.
≥“To show other pages” l41
[7] Press [SUB MENU].
[8] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item
and press [ENTER].
∫To play a chapter
Press [ENTER] after step 6.
∫To stop chapter play
Press [∫, STOP]. (The Chapter View screen appears.)
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
[8] Select “Add Chapter” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
≥Refer to “Creating playlists”, steps 5–8. (l44)
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
[8] Select “Move Chapter” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[9] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to
select the position to
insert the chapter and
press [ENTER].
≥The chapter is moved and
inserted before the
highlighted chapter.
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
[8] Select “Create
Chapter” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[9] Press [ENTER] at the
point you want to
divide. (l43, “For quicker
editing”)
≥Repeat this step to divide at
other points.
[10]
Select “Exit” with [4] and press [ENTER].
Note
≥A short portion of the recording just after the creation point may be
lost.
For your reference
≥The divided titles retain the name of the original title. They also
retain the CPRM property (l76) of the original.
≥It is not possible to carry out “Create” when the resulting part(s) are
extremely short.
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
[8] Select “Combine Chapters” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[9] Select “Combine” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥The selected chapter and next chapter are combined.
[RAM] (“Multiple editing” l41)
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
[8] Select “Delete Chapter” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[9] Select “Delete” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥Even if you delete the chapter, the original title is not deleted.
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
[8] Select “View Playlists” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
You go back to Playlist View.
1Change Thumbnail
Chapter operations
∫ View Chapters
1Add Chapter
1Move Chapter
PLAYLISTS Change Thumbnail
DVD-RAM Change
Exit
0:00.00
0:00.00
Change
47
RQTV0141
Editing still pictures
[RAM] [SD]
≥You can edit pictures or albums.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(l8).
≥Still pictures recorded on CD-R or CD-RW cannot be edited.
[1] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[2] [RAM]
Press the [B] button to select “Picture”.
[3] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album or still
picture.
≥To edit still picture:
- Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select album which contains picture
you want to edit and press [ENTER].
≥“To show other pages” l right
≥“To select the still pictures in another folder” l 35
[4] Press [SUB MENU].
≥To edit the album
≥To edit still picture
[5] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item and press
[ENTER].
≥After this operation, follow the desired operation.
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Editing still pictures”.
[5] Select “Add Picture” or “Create Album” with
[3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[6] Press [2] to select “Start” or “Yes” and press
[ENTER].
[7] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album which
contains picture you want to add and press
[ENTER].
≥“To select the still pictures in another folder” l 35
[8] Press [3, 4] to select the item and press
[ENTER].
≥If “Select pictures to copy” is selected:
- Select the still picture you want to add and press [ENTER].
≥If “Copy all pictures” is selected:
- All the still pictures in the album will be copied.
[9] Press [2] to select “No” and press [ENTER].
≥If you want to continue copying, select “Yes” and go to step 7.
[10]Only for “Create Album”
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [ENTER].
≥When you select “Yes”, refer to “Entering text”. (l58)
[RAM] [SD] (Multiple editing is possible. labove)
≥Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Editing still pictures”.
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
[5] Select “Delete Picture” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[6] Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press
[ENTER].
[RAM] [SD] (Multiple editing is possible. labove)
≥Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Editing still pictures”.
If set, this will protect the still picture from accidental erasure.
[5] Select “Set Protection” or “Cancel Protection”
with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[6] Press [2] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥The lock symbol appears when the still picture is protected.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive (DVD or SD).
≥Release protection (disc l60, cartridge l60, card l60).
Editing still pictures
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
DRIVE
SELECT
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
SUB MENU
∫
BRETURN
FUNCTIONS
:, 9
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
1
;
Numeric
buttons
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Add Picture
Create Album
Edit Album
Select Root folder
e.g., [SD]
≥This is only displayed when there are
other higher folders that can be viewed.
(To select the still pictures in another
folder l35)
≥“Start Slideshow/Slideshow settings”
l36
Set Protection
Album View
Delete Picture
Cancel Protection
Print Order (DPOF)
e.g., [SD]
Various operations
∫To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP] to show other
pages.
∫Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;, PAUSE]. (Repeat)
A check mark appears. Press [;, PAUSE] again to cancel.
Album and picture operations
∫ Add Picture/Create Album
∫ Delete Picture
∫ Set Protection/Cancel Protection
Creating, editing and playing playlist/Editing still pictures
M6VP&PC.book 47 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
48
RQTV0141
Editing still pictures
[SD] (Multiple editing is possible. l47)
≥Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Editing still pictures”.
You can select a whole folder or individual pictures for printing and
specify the number of prints to be made.
[5] Select “Print Order (DPOF)” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[6] Press [2, 1] to select
number of print (0to9) and
press [ENTER].
≥The DPOF mark appears.
(This appears on the still pictures inside a folder when
you make the DPOF setting for the folder.)
∫To cancel the print setting
Set the number of prints to “0”.
For your reference
≥Print settings (DPOF) made using this unit may not be viewable on
other equipment.
≥When this is set by this unit, any settings established by other units
will be released.
≥Settings cannot be made for folders and files not in accordance
with DCFe s 6( )-15no ranchess on tsa.
,
49
RQTV0141
Transferring (Copying)
You can select from a variety of methods to transfer (copy) on the unit.
You cannot transfer (copy) titles which have been treated to prevent copying.
°Since you cannot create playlists on +RW, you cannot copy those. [+RW]
Before transferring (copying)
Direction Type of transfer (copying) you want Suitable methods
From To
VHS
DVD-RAM, DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-
RW(DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL or
+RW
Easy transferring (copying) with one button
≥When you want to transfer (copy) from the selected start
point to the end of the tape
One Touch Transfer
(l50)
Transferring (copying) with detailed settings
≥When you want to transfer (copy) from the selected start
point to the end of the tape
≥When you want to transfer (copy) for the limited amount of
time
≥When you want to transfer (copy) to fit in the remaining
capacity of the disc
GUI Transfer (l51)
DVD-RAM, +RW or
DVD-RW (DVD Video
Recording format)
VHS
Easy transferring (copying) with one button
≥When you want to transfer (copy) a whole disc
≥When you want to transfer (copy) from the beginning of the
selected title and playlist to the end of the disc°
One Touch Transfer
(l52)
Transferring (copying) with detailed settings
≥When you want to transfer (copy) multiple titles or playlists in
combination°
GUI Transfer (l53)
DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R or +R DL
VHS
Easy transferring (copying) with one button
≥When you want to transfer (copy) a whole disc
≥When you want to transfer (copy) from the beginning of the
selected title to the end of the disc
One Touch Transfer
(l52)
Transferring (copying) with detailed settings Cannot transfer
Finalized DVD-R, DVD-
R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format), +R,
+R DL or DVD-Video
on sale that are not
copy-protected, etc.
VHS
Easy transferring (copying) with one button Cannot transfer
Transferring (copying) with detailed settings
≥When you want to transfer (copy) whole of a disc
≥When you want to transfer only for the specified time DVD-Video Transfer
(l54)
∫Caution for transfer (copying) from VHS to DVD
≥Copy-protected video tapes cannot be copied. Most video tapes
are copy-protected to prevent illegal copying so they cannot be
copied.
≥When a copy-protected tape is inserted, a message appears on
the display and the recording stops on the spot.
≥If a part of a tape recorded in VP mode is copied to disc, noise
may appear at the beginning of the copied part.
Only the following operations are allowed while transferring
(copying):
≥Stopping transfer (One Touch or GUI Transfer) by pressing and
holding [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.
≥Stopping transfer (One Touch Transfer) by pressing [∫, STOP].
When transfer (copying) is started, the following operations
also start automatically
≥“Status Messages” on Display ) “Off” (l65) (One Touch or
GUI Transfer)
∫Caution for transfer (copying) from DVD to VHS
≥Copy-protected discs cannot be copied. Most discs are copy-
protected to prevent illegal copying so they cannot be copied.
Only the following operations are allowed while transferring
(copying):
≥Stopping transfer (One Touch or GUI Transfer) by pressing and
holding [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.
≥Stopping transfer (One Touch Transfer) by pressing [∫, STOP].
When transfer (copying) is started, the following operations
also start automatically
≥“Status Messages” on Display ) “Off” (l65) (One Touch or
GUI Transfer)
≥Audio output when playing back DVD ) Stereo (L R) [RAM]
(One Touch or GUI Transfer)
When the playback location of the disc is recorded by the
Resume Function (l32) and you start transferring (copying), the
transfer (copying) is executed from the top of the title which
contains the starting position of playback to the end of the disc.
∫Copying still pictures [RAM] [SD]
≥When you want to copy all still pictures on a SD card. (l55)
≥When you want to copy multiple still pictures in combination. (l55)
Editing still pictures/Transferring (Copying)
M6VP&PC.book 49 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
50
RQTV0141
Transferring (Copying)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can transfer (copy) programs recorded on a tape onto a disc°
with one stroke of the button.
In One Touch Transfer (Copying), programs are automatically
transferred (copied) onto the disc from the location of playback at
the time when the transfer (copying) of the tape starts.
°Available discs for transfer (copying) from tape are DVD-RAM,
non-finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL, and +RW.
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
DVD
≥Release protection (disc l60, cartridge l60). [RAM]
≥Insert a disc and confirm there is sufficient empty space for
recording (l24, 40).
≥Select the recording mode. (l26)
≥When SAP broadcast program is played back on VHS, select the
audio to be recorded on disc in “Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)” in
the “Setup” menu. (l64) [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
VHS
≥
Insert the video cassette containing the program to be copied
(l
11
,
24)
.
[1] While both DVD and VHS are
stopped
Press and hold [“ DVD] on
the main unit for about
3 seconds or more (until
“START” on the unit’s
display terminates flashing).
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
And then press [¥, REC]
or [1, PLAY] on the main
unit to copy the disc with
or without finalizing.
≥Check if transfer (copying) starts properly.
≥
Copying is automatically completed when the tape reaches its
end or the disc becomes full.
≥If you press [¥, REC] on the main unit to finalize;
After finalizing, the discs become play-only and you can also
play them on other DVD equipment.
However, you can no longer record or edit.
≥In case the copying doesn’t complete due to shortage of
remaining time of disc or etc., the finalizing doesn’t start.
∫To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press [∫, STOP] or press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds
or more.
≥However, you cannot stop finalizing after it has started.
Notes
≥While One Touch Transfer (Copying) is activated, a scheduled
recording cannot be started.
≥When the transfer (copying) is not started or not executed, the
“COPYING” indicator blinks for about 7 seconds. Check if the unit
is properly prepared.
Transfer (Copying) from VHS
∫ One Touch Transfer (Copying) (VHSlDVD)
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
∫
RETURN
FUNCTIONS
1
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
E
CT
REC
COPYINGCOPYING
SD CARD/DV IN
[ , STOP] [ , REC]
[1, PLAY]
COPYING indicator
Numeric
buttons
≥If you press [¥, REC] on the main unit, the disc will
automatically be finalized after copying completes.
≥If you press [1, PLAY] on the main unit, you can start
copying without finalizing.
≥If you press [∫, STOP] on the main unit, you can cancel to
copy.
∫Dividing a title to be copied
In One Touch Transfer (Copying) from VHS to DVD, the title is
divided by index signal detected and then recorded. You can
search desired titles with Direct Navigator’s Title View (l41) after
transfer (copy) to DVD.
≥Titles recorded within 15 minutes (25 minutes in VP mode) of
each other may not be divided properly.
≥The recording time may become longer than the original title
depending on the number of index signals.
If you want to transfer (copy) without dividing the contents
into titles, follow the methods below.
≥Set “Time Limit” to “On” on the GUI transfer (l51).
e.g.; [RAM]
Copy
Do you want to finalize the disc after copying?
"Finalize" the disc to enable it for playback on
compatible DVD players.
Note: titles cannot be added to finalized discs.
Press REC to start copying. The DVD will
automatically be finalized after copying completes.
Press PLAY to start copying without finalizing.
Press STOP to cancel copying.
M6VP&PC.book 50 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
51
RQTV0141
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can transfer (
copy
) programs recorded on a tape onto a disc
°°
from the location
°
of playback as of the transfer (
copy
ing) start of the
tape.
°When you set the recording mode to “FR” and “Time Limit” to
“Off”, you can transfer (copy) the whole tape from the beginning to
the end. (l below)
°° Available discs for transfer (copying) from tape are DVD-RAM,
non-finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL, and +RW.
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
DVD
≥Release protection (disc l60, cartridge l60). [RAM]
≥Insert a disc and confirm there is sufficient empty space for
recording on it (l24, 40).
≥When SAP broadcast program is played back on VHS, select the
audio to be recorded on discs in “Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)”
in the “Setup” menu. (l64) [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
VHS
≥
Insert the video cassette containing the program to be copied
(l
11
,
24).
[1] While both DVD and VHS are stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2]
Select “Copy”
with
[
3
,
4
]
and press
[ENTER].
[3] Set the transfer
(copying) direction.
≥Set “Source” to “VHS”.
≥If you are not going to change
the copy direction, press [4],
then skip to step 4.
∫To change the setting
(1)Make sure “Copying Direction” is selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Source” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Press [3, 4] to select “VHS” and press [ENTER].
≥When you set “Source” to “VHS”, “DVD” is automatically
selected on “Destination”.
(4)Press [2].
(5)Press [4].
[4] Set the recording mode.
≥If you are not going to change
the recording mode, press [4],
then skip to step 5.
∫To change the setting
(1)Make sure “Mode” is selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Recording Mode” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Select recording mode (XP, SP, LP, EP or FR) with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
≥“About FR mode” (l right)
(4)Press [2].
(5)Press [4].
[5] Set the time limit.
≥If you are not going to change
the recording time, press [4],
then skip to step 6.
∫To change the setting
(1)Make sure “Time Limit” is
selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Time Limit” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Select time limit (“On” or “Off”) with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
≥“When you select “Off”, proceed to Step (6) below.
(4)Press [3, 4] to select “Set time” and press [ENTER].
(5)Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4] to
set the recording time, and then press [ENTER].
≥You can also set the set time with the numeric buttons.
≥Maximum recording time is 8 hours.
(6)Press [2].
(7)Press [4].
[6] Make sure “Start
Copying” is selected
and press [ENTER].
≥The confirmation screen
appears.
[7] Select “Yes” with [2]
and press [ENTER].
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
And then press [2, 1] to
select “Copy and
finalize” or “Copy only”
and press [ENTER].
≥Transfer (copying) is started.
≥Transfer (copying) is
automatically stopped when the tape reaches the end or the
remaining capacity of the disc is filled. (A message appears on
the TV screen and then disappears a few seconds later.)
≥If “Copy and finalize” is selected;
After finalizing, the discs become play-only and you can
also play them on other DVD equipment.
However, you can no longer record or edit.
≥In case the copying doesn’t complete due to shortage of
remaining time of disc or etc., the finalizing doesn’t start.
∫To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.
≥However, you cannot stop finalizing after it has started.
∫ GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer
(Copying)
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction Source
Destination
Mode
VHS-Video SP
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction Content Type VHS-Video
SP
Recording Mode
Mode
Time Limit
VHS DVD
VHS-Video
Off
SP
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction Time Limit
Destination Capacity: 2:00
Off
Mode
Time Limit
VHS DVD
VHS-Video
Off
SP
∫About FR Mode
When “Time Limit” is set to “Off” in Step 5 above:
≥The recording mode is automatically selected by estimating the
remaining capacity of the disc for transfer (copying) of only the
recorded parts in the video cassette (unrecorded parts will not
be recorded).
≥When you press [ENTER] to start transfer (copy), the tape is
automatically fast-forwarded to the end and then fast-rewound
to the beginning before the transfer (copying) is actually started.
It may take time to start transfer (copy). If the remaining
capacity of the disc is insufficient, the transfer (copying) will be
stopped in the middle.
≥The recording is divided into titles every time the tape index
signals are detected.
When “Time Limit” is set to “On” in Step 5 above:
≥The recording mode is automatically determined by estimating
the remaining capacity of the disc for transfer (copying) of the
contents equivalent to the recording time set from the start point
of the transfer (copying) on the video cassette (unrecorded
parts will also be recorded).
≥The recording is not divided into titles.
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction
Press ENTER to start copying.
Mode
Time Limit
VHS DVD
VHS-Video
1:15
SP
Start Copying
ENTER
Copying starts.
Note: After copying, the disc should be finalized
for playback on compatible DVD players.
Copy and finalize Copy only
"Finalize" the disc to enable it for playback on
compatible DVD players.
Note: titles cannot be added to finalized disc.
Transferring (Copying)
M6VP&PC.book 51 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
52
RQTV0141
Transferring (Copying)
You can transfer (copy) titles recorded on a disc° onto a tape with
one touch of the button.
In One Touch Transfer (copying), all contents on the disc are
automatically copied onto the tape.
°Available discs for transfer (copying) onto tape are
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›].
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
DVD
≥Insert the disc containing the program to be copied (l24).
VHS
≥ Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
(l11, 24)
≥Confirm that the remaining tape time is sufficient for recording.
(l40)
≥Select the recording mode. (l26)
[1] Press and hold [VHS —] on the main unit for
about 3 seconds or more (until “START” on the
unit’s display terminates flashing).
≥Check if transfer (copying) starts
properly.
≥Copying is automatically completed
when playback of the disc is finished
or the tape reaches its end.
∫To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press [∫, STOP] or press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds
or more.
Notes
≥While One Touch Transfer (Copying) is activated, a scheduled
recording cannot be started.
≥When the transfer (copying) is not started or not executed, the
“COPYING” indicator blinks for about 7 seconds. Check to make
sure the unit is properly prepared.
≥If you start transfer (copying) when resume function is activated,
the DVD is copied from the beginning of the title which you
stopped.
Transfer (Copying) from DVD
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
∫
SUB MENU
ARETURN
B
FUNCTIONS
1
:, 9
;
T
REC
COPYINGCOPYING
SD CARD/DV IN
53
RQTV0141
[RAM] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
You can transfer (copy) multiple titles or playlists recorded on a disc
onto a tape in combination.
≥Available discs for transfer (copy) onto tape are [RAM] [-RW‹VR›].
≥Since you cannot create playlists on +RW, you cannot copy those.
[+RW]
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
DVD
≥Insert the disc containing the program to be copied (l24).
VHS
≥ Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
(l11, 24)
≥
Confirm that the remaining tape time is sufficient for recording.
(l40)
[1] While both DVD and VHS are stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2]
Select “Copy”
with
[
3
,
4
]
and press
[ENTER].
[3] Set “Copying Direction”.
≥Set “Source” to “DVD”.
≥If you are not going to change the copy direction, press [4],
then skip to step 4.
∫To change the setting
(1)Make sure “Copying Direction” is selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Source” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Press [3, 4] to select “DVD”
and press [ENTER].
≥When you set “Source” to
“DVD”, “VHS” is
automatically selected on
“Destination”.
(4)Press [2].
(5)Press [4].
[4] Set the recording mode.
≥If you are not going to change
the recording mode, press [4],
then skip to step 5.
∫To Change the setting
(1)Make sure “Mode” is selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Recording Mode” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Select recording mode (SP, EP or VP) with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
(4)Press [2].
(5)Press [4].
[5] Register titles and playlists for transfer
(copying).
≥If you are going to transfer a registered list without making any
changes to it, press [4], then skip to step 6.
∫To set for the
registration
(1)Make sure “Create List” is
selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “New Entry (Total
= 0)” is selected and press
[ENTER].
(3)Press [A] to select “Video” or
press [B] to select “Playlists”.
≥You can also select the view
by selecting “Other View”
from the SUB MENU.
1Press [SUB MENU].
2Make sure “Other View” is
selected and press
[ENTER] twice.
(4)Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select
the title or playlist and press
[ENTER].
≥You can register multiple
titles or playlists to the
copying list by repeating the
above steps 2 to 4.
(“To edit the transfer
(copying) list” l54)
≥“To show other pages”
(l below)
≥“Multiple editing” (l below)
(5)Press [2].
≥Before pressing [2], make
sure that the value on
“Copying list” is smaller than
the value on “Current Remaining”.
(6)Press [4].
[6] When you finish creating the
copying list,
Make sure to select
“Start Copying” and
press [ENTER].
≥The confirmation screen
appears.
[7] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥Transfer (copying) is started.
∫To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.
∫ GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer
(Copying)
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction Source
Destination
Mode
VHS-Video SP
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction Content Type Video
SP
Recording Mode
Mode
Create List
DVD VHS
Video
0
SP
Various operations
∫To show other pages
Press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP].
≥Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER] to show other pages.
∫Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;, PAUSE]. (Repeat)
Press [ENTER] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;, PAUSE] again to cancel.
≥When you switch between the “Video” and “Playlists” tab, the
check mark is canceled.
≥Titles or playlists are registered to the copying list in ascending
order of title number.
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction
New Entry (Total = 0)
Current Remaining: 6:00
Total list size: 0:00 ( 0%)
Mode
Create List
DVD VHS
Video
0
SP
Title NameNo. Size
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction
Current Remaining: 6:00
Total list size: 0:00 ( 0%)
Mode
DVD VHS
Video SP
Title NameNo. Size
New Entry (Total = 0)
- -
Create List
Previous Page 02/02 Next
DVD-RAM
- -
- -- -- -
08
07
Select Previous NextSUB MENU
10 10/25 Mon
123
8 10/25 Mon
ABC
ENTER
PlaylistsVideo
2:00 (SP)
07
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction
Page 01/01
Create a Copying list.
Current Remaining: 6:00
Total list size: 2:30 (42%)
Mode
Create List
DVD VHS
Video SP
Start Copying
Title NameNo.
01
02
2:00 SP (33%)
0:30 SP ( 7%)
ABC
123
Size
New Entry (Total = 2)
SUB MENU
ENTER
Registered titles
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction
Press ENTER to start copying.
Mode
Create List
DVD VHS
Video
2
SP
Start Copying
ENTER
Transferring (Copying)
M6VP&PC.book 53 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
54
RQTV0141
Transferring (Copying)
You can transfer (copy) the contents of a disc being played onto a
tape for the set time while playing the disc.
After performing steps 1 to 4 of “GUI (Graphical User Interface)
Transfer (Copying)” (l53),
[5] Set “Time Limit”.
≥If you are not going to change
the setting, press [4], then
skip to step 6.
∫Setting the unit to
transfer (copy)
according to the set time
(1)Make sure “Time Limit” is
selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Time Limit” is selected and press [ENTER].
≥Setting the unit to transfer (copy) all the content on the disc
(3)Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [ENTER].
(4)Press [2].
≥Setting the transfer (copying) time
(3)Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [ENTER].
(4)Press [3, 4] to select “Set time” and press [ENTER].
(5)Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4] to
set the recording time, and then press [ENTER].
≥You can also set the set time with the numeric buttons.
≥Maximum recording time is 8 hours.
(6)Press [2].
(7)Press [4].
[6] Make sure “Start
Copying” is selected
and press [ENTER].
Press [2] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER] to start transfer
(copy).
The disc top menu is displayed.
≥Disc play automatically begins
from title 1 when “First Title” is selected from the “Playback will
start with:” menu when finalizing the disc (l61).
[7] When the top menu is
displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to
select the title you want
to start transferring
(copying), and press
[ENTER].
≥While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time.
≥After the last title on the disc has finished playing, the top
menu is recorded until the set time is reached.
∫To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press [∫, STOP] or press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds
or more.
Notes
≥The screen on the right (screen saver) is
recorded at the beginning.
≥It is recorded as 1 title from the start of transfer
(copying) to the end (even if there are multiple
programs).
≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top menu does not
display automatically, press [1, PLAY] to start.
≥REC only appears on the unit’s display when transferring from
DVD-Video.
To edit the transfer (copying) list
Select the item in step 5 (4). (l53)
[1] Select a desired item with [3, 4] and press
[SUB MENU].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[ENTER].
Clear All:
Clear all items registered on the transfer (copying) list.
≥Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add:
Add new items to the transfer (copying) list.
≥Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the titles and playlists to be added
and press [ENTER].
Remove:
Remove the selected item.
≥Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥Multiple editing is possible. (l53)
Move:
Move selected items or change the order of items on the transfer
(copying) list.
≥Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [ENTER].
To cancel all registered transfer (copying) settings and lists
After performing steps 1 to 4 (l53)
[1] Press [3, 4] to select
“Cancel All” and press
[ENTER].
[2] Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”
and press [ENTER].
≥The settings and lists may be canceled in the following
situations.
-When a title or a playlist has been recorded or erased at the
transfer (copying) source.
-When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit
or open the tray.
Add
Remove
Move
Clear All
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction
Press ENTER to cancel all settings.
Mode
DVD VHS
Video SP
∫ Transfer (Copying) a DVD-Video, finalized
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, or +RDL
≥Operations and on screen displays during transfer
(copying) are also recorded.
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be transferred (copied).
≥The following cannot be transferred (copied): DVD-Audio, Video
CD, Audio CD and so on.
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction Time Limit
Current Remaining: 2:00
Set the time limit.
On
Mode
Time Limit
DVD VHS
DVD-Video
2:00
SP
Start Copying
2:00
Set time
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction
Press ENTER to start copying.
Mode
Time Limit
DVD VHS
DVD-Video
2:00
SP
Start Copying
ENTER
Previous Play Next
01
Chapter 1
02
Chapter 2
03
Chapter 3
04
Chapter 4
05
Chapter 5
06
Chapter 6
07
Chapter 7
08
Chapter 8
My favorite 01/02
M6VP&PC.book 54 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
55
RQTV0141
[RAM] [SD]
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(l8).
≥Still pictures recorded on CD-R or CD-RW cannot be copied.
[SD]
Put the card in the slot, and the menu (lbelow) is automatically
displayed. Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures” and press
[ENTER]. Then you can continue from step 4 right.
[SD] > [RAM]
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
≥Release protection (disc l60, cartridge l60). [RAM]
≥Insert a disc and confirm there is sufficient empty space for
recording on it (l24, 40).
≥Inserting, Removing the SD card. (l11)
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the SD drive.
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select “Other Functions” and
press [ENTER].
[3] Press [3, 4] to select “Copy all Pictures” and
press [ENTER].
≥If there is a multiple number of higher folders recognizable, you
can switch them using [2, 1].
[4] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy” and press
[ENTER].
∫To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
[RAM] [SD]
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select “Copy”and press
[ENTER].
[3] Set “Copying Direction”.
≥If you are not going to change the copy direction, press [4],
then skip to step 4.
∫To change the setting
(1)Make sure “Copying Direction” is selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Source” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Press [3, 4] to select the
drive and press [ENTER].
(4)Press [3, 4] to select
“Destination” and press
[ENTER].
(5)Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
≥The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
(6)Press [2].
(7)Press [4].
[4] Press [4] to select “Create List”.
≥“Mode” does not need to be set as “Content Type” and
“Recording Mode” are automatically set.
Transfer (Copying) still picture
Notes
≥When copying the still pictures on a album by folder basis
(l56, To register on a folder by folder basis) or card by card
basis (l right, Copy All Pictures), files other than the still picture
files inside the folder will also be copied. (This does not apply to
the lower folders contained inside the folders.)
≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing
still pictures.
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum, copying will
stop partway through.
≥When a name has not been input for the copy source folder, it is
possible that this folder’s name will not be the same on the copy
destination. It is recommended that you input a folder name
before copying (l48).
≥Print number setting (DPOF) is not copied.
≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the
copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
∫
SUB MENU
DRIVE
SELECT
RETURN
FUNCTIONS
1
Numeric
buttons
ENTER
SD Card inserted.
Select an action or press RETURN.
SD Card operations
Go to Album View
Copy pictures
∫ Copying all the still pictures on a card
—Copy All Pictures
∫ GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer
(Copying)
Copy All Pictures (JPEG)
Copy from SD card
\DCIM
Copy to DVD
\JPEG\DCIM001
Copyallpictures(JPEG)in thecard
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction Source
Destination
Mode
Picture High Speed
SD card
DVD
Transferring (Copying)
M6VP&PC.book 55 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
56
RQTV0141
Transferring (Copying)
[5] Register still pictures
for transfer (copying).
≥If you are going to transfer a
registered list without making
any changes to it, press [4],
then skip to step 6.
≥You can register still pictures or still picture folders.
≥Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same list.
∫To register individual still pictures
(1)Make sure “Create List” is selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “New Entry (Total = 0)” is selected and press
[ENTER].
(3)Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a still picture and press
[ENTER].
≥You can register multiple still pictures to the copying list by
repeating the above steps 2 to 3.
(Copying list display and convenient functions: l right)
≥“To show other pages” l below
≥“Multiple editing” l below
(4)Press [2].
(5)Press [4].
∫To register on a folder by folder basis
(1)Make sure “Create List” is
selected and press [1].
(2)Press [3, 4] to select
“Picture/Folder” and press
[ENTER].
(3)Press [3, 4] to select
“Folder” and press [ENTER].
(4)Press [3, 4] to select “New Entry (Total = 0)” and press
[ENTER].
(5)Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
≥You can register multiple still folders to the copying list by
repeating the above steps 4 – 5.
(Copying list display and convenient functions: l right)
≥“To show other pages” l below
≥“Multiple editing” l below
(6)Press [2].
(7)Press [4].
[6] When you finish creating the copying list,
Make sure to select “Start Copying” and press
[ENTER].
≥For individual still pictures only
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,
select “Folder”.
[7] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥Transfer (copying) is started.
∫To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Various operations
∫To show other pages
Press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP].
≥Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER] to show other pages.
∫Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;, PAUSE]. (Repeat)
Press [ENTER] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;, PAUSE] again to cancel.
≥Still picture or folder are registered to the copying list in
ascending order of number.
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction
New Entry (Total = 0)
Destination capacity: 4341MB
Mode
Create List
SD card DVD
Picture
0
High Speed
Title NameNo. Size Picture
Picture/Folder
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction
New Entry (Total = 0)
Destination capacity: 4341MB
Mode
Create List
SD card DVD
Picture
0
High Speed
Title NameNo. Size Picture
Picture/Folder
Folder New folder
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
---
-
New folder
To edit the transfer (copying) list
Select the item in step 5–(3) (for a still picture) or
5–(5) (for a folder) (l left)
[1] Select a desired item with [3, 4] and press
[SUB MENU].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press [ENTER].
Clear All:
Clear all items registered on the transfer (copying) list.
≥Press [2] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add:
Add new items to the transfer (copying) list.
≥Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder to be
added and press [ENTER].
Remove:
Remove the selected item.
≥Press [2] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥Multiple editing is possible. (l left)
To cancel all registered transfer (copying) settings and lists
After performing steps 1 to 2
(l55)
[1] Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel
All” and press [ENTER].
[2] Press [2] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
≥
The settings and lists may be canceled in the following situations.
-When a title or still picture has been recorded or erased at the
transfer (copying) source.
-When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
To select another folder
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
≥If you want to switch to another higher folder (l below)
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
≥You can also select folders by entering a 3-digit number
with the numeric buttons.
e.g.: “5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
≥The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the
same list.
To switch to another higher folder
≥Only when selecting the source folder
If there is a multiple number of higher
folders recognizable,
While the screen on the right appears
[1] Press [SUB MENU].
[2]
Press [
3
,
4
] to select “Select Root Folder” and press [ENTER].
[3] Press [2, 1] to select the higher folder and press [ENTER].
[4] Press [3, 4] to select the desired folder and press [ENTER].
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
∫
SUB MENU
DRIVE
SELECT
RETURN
FUNCTIONS
1
:, 9
;
INPUT SELECT
REC MODE
µ
CH, W, X
Numeric
buttons
Add
Remove
Clear All
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction
Press ENTER to cancel all settings.
Mode
DVD VHS
Video SP
Create List Select pictures
SD CARD
0001
Folder 103__DVD
0002 0003 0004
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
---
\DCIM\100__DVD
004 103__DVD
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
---
\DCIM\100__DVD
004 103__DVD
M6VP&PC.book 56 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
57
RQTV0141
When connecting the IN2 input terminals on the front of the unit
≥You can also connect to the IN1 input terminals on the rear of the
unit.
Notes
≥When recording using the unit’s input terminals, only the sound
received at the time of recording will be recorded. As long as
secondary audio that is recorded on the media in the external
device is not output to the unit in play, it is not recorded.
≥If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural, connect to
L/MONO. (Both left and right channels are recorded when
connected through L/MONO.)
≥The S-VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.
Preparation
DVD [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Release protection (disc l60, cartridge l60). [RAM]
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
VHS
≥Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
(l24)
≥Select VHS side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1] Press [REC MODE] to select the recording
mode. (DVD l26, VHS l26)
≥DVD [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
- It is also possible to perform Flexible Recording (FR). (l29)
[2] While stopped
Press [CH, X, W] or [INPUT SELECT] to select
the input channel for the equipment you have
connected.
≥Select IN1 or IN2.
Follow the above steps 1 to 2.
[3] Start play on the external device.
[4] Press [¥, REC] at the point where you want to
start recording.
Follow the above steps 1 to 2.
[3] Press [1, PLAY].
≥Start playing the video cassette and find the recording start
point.
[4] Press [;, PAUSE], then press [¥, REC].
≥Put the unit in recording standby mode.
[5] Start play on the external device.
[6] Press [;, PAUSE] at the point where you want
to start recording.
∫To skip unwanted parts
Press [;, PAUSE] to pause recording. (Press again to restart
recording.)
∫To stop recording
Press [∫, STOP].
For your reference
≥Almost all videos and DVD software on sale have been treated to
prevent illegal copying. Such software cannot be recorded.
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Programs are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are
created at each break in the images and the playlist is created
automatically. [RAM]
Preparation
≥Turn on the main unit and DV equipment.
≥Select the type of audio recording from “Select Audio Channel for
DV Input” in the Audio menu. (l64)
When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video
camcorder), you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape
only.
≥Pause play on the DV equipment at the point you want recording to
start.
≥Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Press [3,4] to select “Other Functions” and
press [ENTER].
[3] Press [3,4] to select “DV Camcorder Rec.”
and press [ENTER].
[4] Press [2,1] to select “Rec.” and press
[ENTER].
When recording finishes
The confirmation screen appears. Press [ENTER] to finish DV
automatic recording.
To stop recording
Press [∫, STOP]. The confirmation screen appears. Press [ENTER].
Notes
≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder)
can be connected to the unit via the DV IN terminal.
≥If you use video camcorders from other manufacturer’s these are
not guaranteed to work.
≥If the DV equipment is in a mode for operating the SD card, it is not
possible to record with “DV Camcorder Rec.”.
≥It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV
equipment.
≥The DV IN terminal on this unit is for use with DV equipment only.
(It cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
≥The date and time information on the tape in the DV equipment will
not be recorded.
≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.
Before connecting any cables, first make sure that the power
for the unit and the external device are off. Then, after
connecting cables, turn on both.
Recording from an external device
DVD
VHS
(2)(1)
(4)
(3)
S VIDEO
IN 2
VIDEO /MONO AUDIO R
L
(1) S-Video cable (not supplied)
(2) Audio/Video cable (not supplied)
AYellow (VIDEO)
BWhite (L)
CRed (R)
(3) DV cable (IEEE 1394 4-pin, not supplied)
(4) External device (Playback equipment)
DV camcorder recording
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the
unit off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for Recording
from an external device (lleft).
Transferring (Copying)
M6VP&PC.book 57 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
58
RQTV0141
Entering text
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
The maximum number of characters:
[RAM] Characters
≥Title 64
≥Title (scheduled recording) 44
≥Playlist 64
≥Album 36
≥Disc 64
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Characters
≥Title 44
≥Disc 40
[SD] Characters
≥Album 36
Note
≥If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
Preparation
≥Insert a disc or card.
≥Release protection (disc l60, title l42, album l48, cartridge
l60, card l60). [RAM] [SD]
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive (DVD or SD).
[1] Show Enter Name screen.
[2] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character you
want to enter and press [ENTER].
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
≥To erase a character
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field
and press [;, PAUSE].
≥Using the numeric buttons to enter characters
e.g., entering the letter “R”.
(1)Press 7 to move to the 7th row.
(2)Press 7 twice to highlight “R”.
(3)Press [ENTER].
≥To enter space
Press [¢, CANCEL] and press
[ENTER].
≥Save/recall phrased (lbelow)
[3] After you have finished naming
Press [∫, STOP].
The title is entered and the screen disappears.
∫To cancel in the middle
Press [RETURN].
≥Characters will not be saved.
For your reference
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the TOP MENU
after finalization (l61). When entering a title name, the name that
will appear in the TOP MENU can be previewed in “Top Menu
Preview (Finalized Disc)” window.
Entering text
Refer to the following pages regarding display of the Enter Name
Screen.
≥Title (l42)
≥Title (scheduled recording) (l30)
≥Disc (l60)
≥Playlist (l45)
≥Album (l48)
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
DRIVE
SELECT
SUB MENU
∫
RETURN
DELETE
FUNCTIONS
:, 9
;
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
AB
Numeric
buttons
Name field: shows the text you have entered
_
Title Name
12345
ABC a
DEF d
GHI
NO
g
JKL j
M
m
67890
bcij
ef/l%
hifl$&
klON@
n]_
o[
Space
Set
Erase
PQRSp
TUV t
WXYZw
qrs()
uv{}-
xyz`^
|
!?
\
. , "':;
π
;
ENTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Phrase Save
Phrase List
∫To save phrases
You can save frequently used phrases and recall them later.
Maximum number of saved phrases: 20
Maximum number of characters per phrase: 20
≥After entering the phrase (step 1 to 2, “Entering text”)
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Phrase Save” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [9, SKIP] to select “Phrase Save”.
[2] Press [2, 1] to select “Save” and press [ENTER].
≥Press [RETURN] to cancel.
∫To recall a saved phrases
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Phrase List” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, SKIP] to select “Phrase List”.
[2] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the phrase to be recalled and
press [ENTER].
∫To erase saved phrases
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Phrase List” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, SKIP] to select “Phrase List”.
[2] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the phrase to be erased.
[3] Press [SUB MENU] to show “Erase Phrase” and press
[ENTER].
[4] Press [2, 1] to select “Erase” and press [ENTER].
[5] Press [RETURN].
NO
JKL
M
PQRS
TUV
5
6
7
8
77 7
_
Title Name
12345
ABC a
DEF d
GHI g
67890
bcij
ef/l%
hifl$&
Top Menu Preview
(Finalized Disc)
1
2
3
4
M6VP&PC.book 58 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
59
RQTV0141
Deleting title or pictures
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l 60, cartridge l60, card l60).
[RAM] [SD]
≥Insert a disc or card.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive (DVD or SD).
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
≥A title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain
before proceeding.
≥You cannot delete while recording.
≥[RAM] [SD] When a recorded title (or a still picture) is deleted the
available disc or card space will increase by the amount deleted.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase after
deletion.
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases when the last
recorded title is deleted. (The recording space may increase
slightly when other titles are deleted.)
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select
“Delete” and press
[ENTER].
∫To switch to the other
view [RAM]
Press [B] to select Picture
View.
Press [A] to select Title View.
[3] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press
[ENTER].
[4] Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press
[ENTER].
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
Once title is deleted, it cannot be restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
[1] During Play
Press [DELETE].
[2] Press [2] to select
“Delete” and press
[ENTER].
For your reference
≥You cannot delete while recording or transferring (copying).
≥[RAM] [SD] When a recorded title (or a still picture) is deleted the
available disc or card space will increase by the amount deleted.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase after
erasing.
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases when the last
recorded title is deleted. (The recording space may increase
slightly when other titles are deleted.)
Selecting recorded titles or pictures to
delete–Delete Navigator
∫To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP] to show
other pages.
∫Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;, PAUSE]. (Repeat)
A check mark appears. Press [;, PAUSE] again to cancel.
- -
DELETE Navigator Title View
Previous Page 02/02 Next
DVD-RAM
- -
- -- -- -
08
07
60
RQTV0141
DVD and card Management
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l right, cartridge lright, card lright).
[RAM] [SD]
≥Insert a disc or card.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive (DVD or SD).
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “DVD Management” or “Card
Management” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
≥When SD has been selected, “Format memory card” only is
displayed.
[4] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item and press
[ENTER].
You can change various settings.
≥After this operation, follow the desired operation.
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD and card Management”.
[4] Select “Disc Name” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Refer to “Entering text” (l58).
≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
≥With a finalized discs and +RW, the name is displayed on the Top
Menu.
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD and card Management”.
This allows you to protect the whole disc from accidental erasure
and release disc protection.
[4] Select “Disc Protection” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥To protect
≥To release protection
∫Protection of cartridge disc or card
[RAM] (With a cartridge)
≥With the write-protect tab in the protect
position, you cannot record to, edit, or erase
from the disc.
[SD]
≥Switch the write-protect switch to the “Lock” position.
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD and card Management”.
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
[4] Select “Delete All Titles” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
[6] Select “Start” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥A message appears when finished.
[7] Press [ENTER].
Notes
≥Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
RETURN
FUNCTIONS
DRIVE
SELECT
3, 4, 2
ENTER
DVD-RAM
FUNCTIONS Cartridge Protection Off
Disc Protection Off
Program
Copy
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
delete
Playback Playlist
Flexible Recording
DV Camcorder Rec.
Setup
DVD Management
e.g., [RAM]
Titles 7
DVD
MANAGEMENT
Disc Name
Delete All Titles
Format Disc (DVD)
Used Time
0 : 58
Free Time
0 : 42 (SP)
Disc Protection Off
DVD-RAM
ENTER
e.g., [RAM]
Providing a disc with a name
Setting the protection
Deleting all titles and playlists
–Delete All Titles
Titles 7
DVD
MANAGEMENT
Disc Name
Used Time
0 : 58
Free Time
0 : 42 (SP)
DiscProtection
DVD-RAM
On
Movie
Disc Protection
Set disc protection.
Note: Protected discs cannot be renamed
or have their content changed,
but can still be re-formatted.
Yes No
Titles 7
DVD
MANAGEMENT
Disc Name
Delete All Titles
Format Disc (DVD)
Used Time
0 : 58
Free Time
0 : 42 (SP)
Disc Protection
DVD-RAM
On
ENTER
Disc Protection
Cancel disc protection.
All write restrictions will
be removed.
Yes No
Titles 7
DVD
MANAGEMENT
Disc Name
Delete All Titles
Format Disc (DVD)
Used Time
0 : 58
Free Time
0 : 42 (SP)
Disc Protection
DVD-RAM
Off
ENTER
PROTECT
LOCK
M6VP&PC.book 60 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
61
RQTV0141
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD and card Management”.
[4] Select “Format Disc (DVD)” or “Format memory
card” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
[6] Select “Start” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥Formatting starts.
≥A message appears when formatting is finished.
Notes
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however it may take
up to a maximum of 70 minutes [RAM].
≥Do not disconnect the AC power supply cord while
formatting. This can render the disc unusable.
[7] Press [ENTER].
∫To stop formatting [RAM]
Press [RETURN].
≥You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc
must be reformatted if you do this.
Notes
≥When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL and CD-R/RW cannot be formatted.
≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.
≥The disc cannot be formatted if the write protect tab (l60) is
switched to “PROTECT”. Release the protection to continue.
≥The message “Unable to format” appears when trying to format
discs the unit cannot use.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD and card Management”.
Select whether to show the top menu after finalizing the disc. Do this
before finalizing the disc.
[4] Select “Playback will start with:” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[5] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item and press
[ENTER].
≥DVD’s Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
≥First Title on DVD:The disc content is played without
displaying the top menu.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD and card Management”.
≥Make selection from “Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
–Playback will start with:” before finalizing the disc. (llower left)
You can play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R
or +R DL on compatible DVD players by finalizing it on the unit,
effectively making it into DVD-Video that complies with DVD-Video
standards.
The menu you create with the unit can also be used on DVD players.
[4] Select “Finalize” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
[6] Select “Start” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥Finalizing starts.
≥You cannot cancel finalizing.
≥A message appears when finalizing is finished.
Notes
≥Finalizing can take a few minutes, up to a maximum of
15 minutes, depending on the remaining space on the disc.
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] up to 60 minutes)
≥Do not disconnect the AC power supply cord while
finalizing. This can render the disc unusable.
[7] Press [ENTER].
Notes
≥When finalizing a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may
take longer than displayed on the confirmation screen
(approximately 4 times).
≥After finalizing
-The disc becomes play-only and you can no longer record or edit
it. [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL]
-You can record and edit the disc after formatting (lleft) although
it becomes play-only after finalizing. [-RW‹V›]
-DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +R DL
finalized on the unit may not be playable on other players
depending on the condition of the recording.
-There is a pause of several seconds between titles and chapters
during play.
-Titles are divided into about 5-minute chapters° ([-R]DL] [+R]DL] 8
minutes)
°This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode
of recording.
≥Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about DVDs.
http://www.panasonic.com/playDVD-R
Deleting all contents of a disc or card
–Format
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding.
The contents are deleted when you format a disc even if you have
set protection.
Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first
–Playback will start with:
Format Disc (DVD)
Formatting the disc will erase all contents.
This will take approximately 1 minute.
Do you want to continue?
Yes No
e.g.; [RAM]
Format Disc (DVD)
Protected contents will be erased too.
Are you sure you want to continue?
Start Cancel
Playback will start with:
DVD's Top Menu
First Title on DVD
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment
–Finalize
Finalize
Finalizing will take approximately
≤
minutes.
Do you want to continue? (Required for
playback on compatible DVD players.)
Yes No
Finalize
Finalizing is necessary to enable playback
of the disc on compatible DVD players.
Once finalized, titles cannot be added
to the disc.
Continue finalizing the disc?
Start Cancel
DVD and card Management
M6VP&PC.book 61 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
62
RQTV0141
DVD and card Management
[-R]DL] [+R]DL]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD and card Management”.
DVD-R DL and +R DL discs have two layer of recording surface on
one side. this unit does not offer seamless recording on two layers.
Recording stops when space on the first layer becomes full. You
must close the first layer to start recording on the second layer.
Closing makes the first layer unavailable for recording (edition is still
available. You cannot cancel closing. Make certain before
proceeding.
[4] Press [3, 4] to select “Close First Layer” and
press [ENTER].
[5] Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
[6] Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press
[ENTER].
Closing the layer starts. You cannot cancel closing.
Closing the layer can take several minutes, up to a maximum of
30 minutes, depending on the remaining space on the first layer.
Note
≥Do not disconnect the AC power supply cord while closing the
layer. This will render the disc unusable.
[7] Press [ENTER].
∫To confirm the layer you can record
You can confirm the remaining recording time on the layer you can
record.
Notes
≥You cannot close the first layer when it has no recording.
≥By closing the layer, you can record or edit discs that have been
recorded on the second layer by other equipment.
[+RW]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD and card Management”.
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you to create the menu before playing a
+RW disc on other equipment.
[4] Press [3, 4] to select “Create DVD Top Menu”
and press [ENTER].
[5] Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
[6] Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press
[ENTER].
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
[7] Press [ENTER].
Notes
≥Recording or editing on the disc may delete the menu. In that case,
create the menu again.
≥You cannot use the title menu for playing on this unit.
Enabling the second layer on DL (dual-
or double-layer on single side) discs to
be recordable
–Close First Layer
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
DRIVE
SELECT
µ
Í
RETURN
FUNCTIONS
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
Numeric
buttons
Titles 7
DVD
MANAGEMENT
Disc Name
Finalize
Used Time
0 : 58
Free Time
0 : 42 (SP)
Of the first layer
Top Menu
Playback will start with:
DVD-R DL
ENTER
Close First Layer
Creating Top Menu
–Create DVD Top Menu
M6VP&PC.book 62 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
63
RQTV0141
Changing the unit’s settings
Use the following procedure to change the settings if necessary.
[1] While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other
Functions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with
[3,4] and press
[ENTER].
[4] Select a menu with [3, 4] and press [2, 1].
[5] Select an item to be changed with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[6] Select an option with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
≥Some options require different operations. Follow the
displayed instructions.
∫To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN]. Even if you have changed an option, the change
is not activated until you press [ENTER].
∫To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
For your reference
≥The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
You can limit play of DVDs unsuitable for some audiences (children,
for example). Play and changes to the settings are not possible
unless you enter a password.
Preparation
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
When setting ratings
The password screen is shown when you select levels 0 to 7.
[1] Input a 4-digit password with the numeric buttons.
≥If you enter a wrong number, press [2] to erase it before you
press [ENTER].
≥Do not forget your password.
[2] Press [ENTER].
[3] Press [ENTER].
The password is entered and the unit is locked.
Now, when you insert a DVD-Video that exceeds the ratings limit
you set, a message appears on the TV.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
When changing ratings
The password screen is shown when you select “Ratings” (l64)
[1] Input a 4-digit password with the numeric buttons and press
[ENTER].
Unlock Recorder: To unlock the unit and return the rating to 8
Change Password: To change your password
Change Level: To change the rating level
Temporary Unlock: To temporarily unlock the unit (the unit locks
again if you switch it to standby or open the
disc tray)
[2] Select a desired item with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
Actual screens depend on the operation. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
This description shows the initial settings for the unit. For
details on menu operation. (lleft)
≥Underlined items are the factory default settings.
≥ indicates settings effective for both DVD and
VHS.
≥ indicates settings effective for DVD only.
≥ indicates settings effective for VHS only.
∫Channel
Signal Source (RF IN) (l19)
Select to suit the type of antenna you are using.
[Antenna] [CableTV]
Set Channels Automatically (l19)
Preset Channel Captions (l20)
Manual Channel Captions (l20)
∫Setup
Off Timer
Select how long the unit remains on when it is not being used.
[2 Hours] [6 Hours] [Off]
Remote Control Code (l21)
[Set Code 1] [Set Code 2] [Set Code 3]
Clock Settings
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Set Clock Automatically (l22)
Set Clock Manually (l19)
Adjust Time Zone (l22)
This corrects the time set in Auto Clock Setting.
The status is not displayed on the Setup menu when the Auto
Clock Setting is not set.
[j1] [0][i1]
Quick Start
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording on DVD-RAM°
°From the power off state, recording on DVD-RAM starts about
1 second after first pressing the [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] and then
sequentially pressing the [¥, REC] (Quick Start Mode).
Power consumption is also higher when the unit is turned off if this is
set to “On”.
[On] [Off]
Restore Default Settings
This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the clock,
channel settings, ratings level, and on-screen language.
[Yes] [No]
Common procedures
Entering a password (Ratings)
No Disc
FUNCTIONS No Disc
Program
Copy
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
(1) (2) (3)
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
VHS ENTER
Audio
Display
TV Screen
Setup Off Timer
Remote Control Code
Clock Settings
Restore Default Settings
6 Hours
Set Code 1
Quick Start On
(1) Menus
(2) Items
(3) Options
Summary of settings
/
/
/
DVD and card Management/Changing the unit’s settings
M6VP&PC.book 63 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
64
RQTV0141
Changing the unit’s settings
≥ Underlined items are the factory default settings.
∫Disc
Settings for Playback
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Ratings (“Entering a password (Ratings)” l63)
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
[8 No Limit]: All DVD-Video can be played.
[1] to [7]: Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
[0 Lock All]: Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
Changing ratings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)
[Unlock Recorder] [Change Password]
[Change Level] [Temporary Unlock]
Play DVD-Audio in Video Mode
Select “Video Mode (Video On)” to play DVD-Video content on
some DVD-Audio.
[Video Mode (Video On)] [Audio Mode (Video Off)]
Audio Language
[English] [French] [Spanish] [Original] [Other ¢¢¢¢]
Subtitle Language
[Automatic] [English] [French] [Spanish] [Other ¢¢¢¢]
Menu Language
[English] [French] [Spanish] [Other ¢¢¢¢]
Choose the language for audio, subtitles and disc menus. [DVD-V]
≥If a language which is not recorded is selected, or if languages
are already fixed on the disc, the language set as the default on
the disc will be played instead.
Original
The original language of each disc will be selected.
Other ¢¢¢¢
This is the language code setting.
Input a code number with the numeric buttons.
(l66, “Language code list”)
Automatic
If the language selected for “Audio Language” is not available,
subtitles of that language will automatically appear if available
on the disc.
Settings for Recording
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Recording Time in EP Mode
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode
[
l26
, “Recording modes and approximate recording times
(DVD)
”]
.
[EP-Extended Play (6H)] [EP-Extended Play (8H)]
∫Video
Still Mode (paused video)
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play.
(l76, “Frame and field”)
[Automatic] [Field] [Frame]
Black Level Control
Select “Normal”, “Lighter” or “Darker” to adjust the black level control
to the desired setting for picture enhancement.
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Input Level
Adjusts the black level of the input signal.
[Lighter] [Darker]
Output Level (Composite/SVideo)
Adjusts the black level of the output signal from the VIDEO OUT
and S VIDEO OUT terminal.
[Lighter][Darker]
Output Level (Component)
Adjusts the black level of the output signal from the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT (Y/PB/PR) terminals.
[Lighter] [Normal][Darker]
∫Audio
Dynamic Range Compression
[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range (l76) for easier listening in low volume.
[On] [Off]
Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type (SAP)
when recording or transferring (copying) to DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format) or +R. (You cannot select the audio type on the unit
when recording audio to DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or
+R from an external device. Select it on the external device.)
[Main] [Secondary Audio Program (SAP)]
Digital Audio Output
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through
the unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (l16).
Press [ENTER] to display the menu.
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz or
88.2 kHz.
≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz despite the above
settings if the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz
or 88.2 kHz, or the disc has copy protection.
[On] [Off]
Dolby Digital
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream” which
processes Dolby Digital signals on other connected
equipment or to convert the signals to “PCM (2ch)” on the unit
before output.
[Bitstream][PCM]
DTS
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream” which
processes DTS signals on other connected equipment
or to convert the signals to “PCM (2ch)” on the unit
before output.
[Bitstream][PCM]
°Incorrect settings can cause noise to be output which can be
harmful to your ears and speakers, and audio will not be recorded
properly on media such as mini discs.
Select Audio Channel for DV Input
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV
in terminal. (l57)
[Stereo 1] [Stereo 2] [Mix]
Video Mode
(Video ON) The setting returns to “Audio Mode (Video Off)”
when you change the disc or turn the unit off.
EP-Extended
Play (6H) You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
disc.
EP-Extended
Play (8H) You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
disc.
Field Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is selected.
Frame Select if you cannot see small text or fine patterns
clearly when “Automatic” is selected.
On Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. (Choose
when the connected equipment cannot process
signals with sampling frequency of 96 kHz or
88.2 kHz.)
Off Signals are output as 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz. (Choose
when the connected equipment can process signals
with sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
Bitstream When you have connected the unit to a piece of
equipment having Dolby Digital logo.
PCM When you have connected the unit to a piece of
equipment that doesn’t have Dolby Digital logo°.
Bitstream When you have connected the unit to a piece of
equipment having DTS logo.
PCM When you have connected the unit to a piece of
equipment that doesn’t have DTS logo°.
Stereo 1 Records audio (L1, R1)
Stereo 2 Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
Mix Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
M6VP&PC.book 64 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
65
RQTV0141
≥ Underlined items are the factory default settings.
∫Display
Status Messages
Choose whether to show status messages automatically or not.
[Automatic] [Off]
On-screen Language
Choose the language for these menus and the on-screen
messages.
[English] [Español] [Français]
Blue Background
Select whether to show the blue background, normally shown when
TV reception is poor.
[On] [Off]
FL Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
[Bright] [Dim] [Automatic]
∫TV Screen
TV Type (l20)
Choose the setting to suit your TV and preference.
[Aspect 4:3 & 480i] [Aspect 4:3 & 480p]
[Aspect 16:9 & 480i] [Aspect 16:9 & 480p]
Functions of HDMI
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
HDMI Video Output
[On] [Off]
HDMI Resolution
You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed.
However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may
be improved by changing the setting.
[Auto] [480p] [720p] [1080i]
HDMI Output Display Aspect
Settings used when 4:3 aspect video is output on the television as
16:9 aspect.
(Only effective when 720p or 1080i is selected as the output
resolution)
[Full] [Normal]
HDMI RGB Output Range
Effective when connected to a device that only supports RGB
output.
[Standard] [Enhanced]
HDMI Audio Output
[On] [Off]
HDMI Connection Speakers Setting
You can set the unit to output the best possible sound for your
speakers.
[Auto] [Multi Channel] [2 Channel]
Multi Channel Setting
Displayed when “Multi Channel” is selected in “HDMI Connection
Speakers Setting”
You can adjust the settings for speaker size, presence and audio-
delay. (l66)
Ctrl with HDMI
[On] [Off]
4:3 TV Settings for DVD-Video
You can select how to display the image on the TV when you watch
16:9 images (DVD-Video) on a 4:3 standard aspect TV. (l76)
[Pan and Scan (Stretch to fit)] [Letterbox (Shrink to fit)]
4:3 TV Settings for DVD-RAM
You can select how to display the image on the TV when you watch
16:9 images (DVD-RAM) on a 4:3 standard aspect TV. (l76)
[4:3 Aspect] [Pan and Scan (Stretch to fit)]
[Letterbox (Shrink to fit)]
∫VHS
Select Tape Length
Set the length of tape you are using so the unit can show the correct
remaining time.
[T120] [T160] [T180]
Jet Search (l37)
Set the speed for Jet Search when playing EP and VP tapes.
≥It is possible to view the picture recorded in EP or VP mode at
approx. 27 or 35 times speed.
[k27] [k35]
≥Select [k27] if the picture is poor at [k35].
Automatic The display turns dark during play, and reappears
momentarily if a button is pressed. When the unit is
66
RQTV0141
Changing the unit’s settings
Change the speaker setting to suit your speakers
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the speaker icon
(a) and press [ENTER].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the setting and press
[ENTER].
Icon examples:
Surround speaker (LS)
≥Large: Select when the
speaker supports
low-frequency (under 100 Hz) reproduction.
≥Small: Select when the speaker does not support low-frequency
reproduction.
If the subwoofer is set to “No”, the front speakers will automatically
be set to “Large”. (In this case, we recommend connecting a
speaker that can reproduce bass below 100 Hz.)
(Effective only when playing multi-channel audio)
If either distance c or e is less than d, find the difference in the
relevant table and change to the recommended setting.
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select an item (b) and
press [ENTER].
[2] Press [3, 4] change the content and press
[ENTER].
Changing the speaker setting to suit your speakers
To set the speaker presence and size (a)
ms
ms
L
Complete
LS
R
SW
C
RS
0.0
0.0
aa
a
aa
a
b
b
Center Front (R)
Front (L)
Complete
(LS) (RS)
Subwoofer
Surround
NoSmallLarge
To set the delay time (b)
d Center speaker
Difference Setting
Approx. 34 cm (11/10 feet) 1.0 ms
Approx. 68 cm (21/5 feet) 2.0 ms
Approx. 102 cm (33/10 feet) 3.0 ms
Approx. 136 cm (42/5 feet) 4.0 ms
Approx. 170 cm (51/2 feet) 5.0 ms
f Surround speakers
Difference Setting
Approx. 170 cm (51/2 feet) 5.0 ms
Approx. 340 cm (11 feet) 10.0 ms
Approx. 510 cm (161/2 feet) 15.0 ms
LR
C
cd
e
SW
LS RS
:Recommended
placement
Language code list
Abkhazian: 6566
Afar: 6565
Afrikaans: 6570
Albanian: 8381
Ameharic: 6577
Arabic: 6582
Armenian: 7289
Assamese: 6583
Aymara: 6589
Azerbaijani: 6590
Bashkir: 6665
Basque: 6985
Bengali, Bangla: 6678
Bhutani: 6890
Bihari: 6672
Breton: 6682
Bulgarian: 6671
Burmese: 7789
Byelorussian: 6669
Cambodian: 7577
Catalan: 6765
Chinese: 9072
Corsican: 6779
Croatian: 7282
Czech: 6783
Danish: 6865
Dutch: 7876
English: 6978
Esperanto: 6979
Estonian: 6984
Faroese: 7079
Fiji: 7074
Finnish: 7073
French: 7082
Frisian: 7089
Galician: 7176
Georgian: 7565
German: 6869
Greek: 6976
Greenlandic: 7576
Guarani: 7178
Gujarati: 7185
Hausa: 7265
Hebrew: 7387
Hindi: 7273
Hungarian: 7285
Icelandic: 7383
Indonesian: 7378
Interlingua: 7365
Irish: 7165
Italian: 7384
Japanese: 7465
Javanese: 7487
Kannada: 7578
Kashmiri: 7583
Kazakh: 7575
Kirghiz: 7589
Korean: 7579
Kurdish: 7585
Laotian: 7679
Latin: 7665
Latvian, Lettish: 7686
Lingala: 7678
Lithuanian: 7684
Macedonian: 7775
Malagasy: 7771
Malay: 7783
Malayalam: 7776
Maltese: 7784
Maori: 7773
Marathi: 7782
Moldavian: 7779
Mongolian: 7778
Nauru: 7865
Nepali: 7869
Norwegian: 7879
Oriya: 7982
Pashto, Pushto: 8083
Persian: 7065
Polish: 8076
Portuguese: 8084
Punjabi: 8065
Quechua: 8185
Rhaeto-Romance: 8277
Romanian: 8279
Russian: 8285
Samoan: 8377
Sanskrit: 8365
Scots Gaelic: 7168
Serbian: 8382
Serbo-Croatian: 8372
Shona: 8378
Sindhi: 8368
Singhalese: 8373
Slovak: 8375
Slovenian: 8376
Somali: 8379
Spanish: 6983
Sundanese: 8385
Swahili: 8387
Swedish: 8386
Tagalog: 8476
Tajik: 8471
Tamil: 8465
Tatar: 8484
Telugu: 8469
Thai: 8472
Tibetan: 6679
Tigrinya: 8473
Tonga: 8479
Turkish: 8482
Turkmen: 8475
Twi: 8487
Ukrainian: 8575
Urdu: 8582
Uzbek: 8590
Vietnamese: 8673
Volapük: 8679
Welsh: 6789
Wolof: 8779
Xhosa: 8872
Yiddish: 7473
Yoruba: 8979
Zulu: 9085
M6VP&PC.book 66 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
67
RQTV0141
Messages
On the unit’s display Page
On the TV Page
H, F
(“” stands for a number.) ≥An error has occurred. The number following “H” or “F” depends on the status of the unit. Check the
items in the “Error messages” section and the “Troubleshooting guide”. If the service number still
does not disappear after the check, follow the Reset procedure described below.
Reset procedure: (“The unit is on but cannot be operated.” l69)
≥
If the service numbers fail to clear, note the service numbers and contact a qualified service person.
–
–
SET
(“
” stands for a number.)
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control. 21
HARD ERR ≥
If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
–
NoREAD ≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.
≥You have used a lens cleaner and it has finished. Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] to eject the disc. 6, 10
24
PLEASE WAIT
(“PLEASE” and “WAIT” are
alternately displayed.)
≥Displayed when the unit is started. This is not a malfunction.
≥The unit is carrying out its recovery process. You cannot operate the unit while “PLEASE WAIT” is
displayed.
–
–
PROG FULL
(“PROG” and “FULL” are
alternately displayed.)
≥There are already 16 scheduled recording programs. Delete unnecessary scheduled recording
programs. 31
UNSUPPORT
(“UNSUP” and “PORT” are
alternately displayed.)
≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on. 7
UNFORMAT
(“UNFOR” and “MAT” are
alternately displayed.)
≥You have inserted a new DVD-RW/+R/+R DL/+RW or a DVD-RAM/DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)
recorded on other equipment. 61
F74 ≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction. –
F75 ≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a internal data malfunction. –
U59 ≥The unit is very warm.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
–
U61 ≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is
carrying out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not
broken. Wait until the message disappears.
–
U71 ≥The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible. –
U72
U73 ≥The HDMI connection acts unusually.
-The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.
-The HDMI cable is too long.
-The HDMI cable is damaged.
–
U88 ≥There was something unusual detected with the disc while recording, playing or transferring
(copying), there was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit
is carrying out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not
broken. Wait until the message disappears.
69
U99 ≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
Now press [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit again to turn the unit on. –
Cannot finish recording
completely. ≥The program was copy-protected.
≥The disc may be full.
≥There are already 99 recorded titles ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 recorded titles).
–
–
–
Cannot play. ≥You inserted an incompatible disc (Discs recorded in PAL video, etc.). –
Cannot record on the disc. ≥The disc may be dirty or scratched. 10
Unable to format.
Please check the disc.
Cannot record. Disc is full. ≥Create space by erasing any unwanted titles. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]
[Even if you erase recorded content from the DVD-R or +R, there is no increase in disc space.
Available
recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases when the last recorded title is
deleted. (The recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted.)]
≥Use a new disc.
41, 59,
60
–
Cannot record. The number of
titles has exceeded the
maximum limit.
Error has occurred. Please
press ENTER. ≥Press [ENTER] to start recovery process. You cannot operate the unit while it is recovering
(“SELF CHECK” appears on the unit’s display). –
No disc ≥You haven’t inserted a disc. Correctly insert a disc that the unit can play.
≥The disc is upside down. If it is a single-sided disc, insert it so the label is facing up.
6, 10, 24
24
No folders. ≥There is no compatible folder in this unit. 8
No SD Card
No valid SD card. ≥The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already inserted, turn off
the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.
≥The card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match.
11
8
No VHS cassette ≥A video cassette is not inserted when recording programs. Insert a video cassette with an accidental
erasure prevention tab. 11, 24
Now recording on DVD.
To watch the VHS playback,
connect a TV to DVD/VHS
COMMON OUT terminal at the
back of the unit, and select the
appropriate input on the TV.
≥The VHS plays back while recording on DVD. You can watch the VHS playback by connect to the
DVD/VHS COMMON terminals. 15
Please change the disc. ≥There may be a problem with the disc. Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to remove it and
check it for scratches or dirt. (The unit turns off automatically after you open the tray.) 10
Please set the clock. ≥The clock is not set when recording programs or setting the scheduled recording. Set the clock. 19, 22
The VHS cassette is
protected. ≥
A video cassette without the accidental erasure prevention tab is inserted when recording programs. Use a
video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
11
This is a non-recordable disc. ≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalized DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW.
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW. Format the disc with the unit.
–
61
This disc is not formatted
properly. ≥The operation is prohibited by the unit, disc or cassette. 32
Changing the unit’s settings/Messages
M6VP&PC.book 67 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
68
RQTV0141
Frequently asked questions
Set up Page
Disc Page
Recording Page
What equipment is
necessary to play multi
channel surround sound?
≥You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other equipment. You must connect
this unit with a HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a built-in (Dolby Digital or
DTS) decoder.
≥An amplifier supporting CPPM and the HDMI standard version 1.1 must be connected to this unit to
play multi-channel audio on a DVD-Audio.
16
–
Can the headphones and
speakers be directly
connected to the unit?
≥You cannot directly connect to the unit. Connect through the amplifier etc. 16
The television has S VIDEO
IN terminal, COMPONENT
VIDEO IN terminals and
HDMI IN terminal. Which
should I connect with?
≥The output picture quality increases in the following order.
-VIDEO IN terminal, S VIDEO IN terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals and HDMI IN
terminal. However the unit will take longer to startup when this it is connected with the HDMI IN
terminal.
–
Is my TV progressive output
compatible? ≥All Panasonic TVs that have 480p input terminals are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you
have another brand of TV.
–
Can I play DVD-Video, DVD-
Audio and Video CDs bought
in another country?
≥You can play them if the video standard is NTSC.
≥However, you cannot play DVD-Video if its region number does not include “1” or “ALL”.
–
Cover
Can a DVD-Video that does
not have a region number be
played?
≥The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot play discs
that do not have a region number.
–
Please tell me about DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R,
+R DL and +RW
compatibility with the unit.
≥The unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW,
and plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format).
≥The unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible discs.
≥After recording but before finalizing +R, +R DL discs
-You may not be able to play and record discs on this unit after recording them on other Panasonic
products or other manufacturer’s equipment.
-You may not be able to play and record discs on other equipment after recording them on this unit.
After finalizing the disc, however, you will be able to play it on any DVD-Video compatible player.
6, 7
6
–
Please tell me about CD-R
and CD-RW compatibility
with the unit.
≥This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following standards:
CD-DA, Video CD, MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF). Close the session or finalize the disc after
recording. This unit can recognize up to 99 folders (groups) and 999 files (tracks) on a disc with MP3
or still pictures (JPEG/TIFF).
≥You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with the unit.
7, 34,
35
7
Can I record from a
commercially purchased
video cassette or DVD?
≥Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore, recording is usually
not possible.
–
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-
RW (DVD-Video format), +R,
+R DL and +RW recorded on
the unit be played on other
equipment?
≥You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalizing the disc on this unit. It is
not necessary to finalize +RW. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of
the disc and capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible. To enable play on other DVD
players, please use “Create DVD Top Menu” in the DVD management menu.
61
Can I record digital audio
signals using the unit? ≥You cannot record digital signals. The digital audio terminals on the unit are for output only. (The
audio recorded from a digital video camcorder using the DV automatic recording function, for
example, is recorded digitally.)
–
Can a digital audio signal
from the unit be recorded to
other equipment?
≥You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio Output”
settings to the following from the Setup menu.
-PCM Down Conversion “On”
-Dolby Digital “PCM”
-DTS “PCM”
However, only
-As long as digital recording from the disc is permitted.
-As long as the recording equipment is compatible with 48 kHz of sampling frequency.
≥You cannot record MP3 signals.
64
–
Can I switch to SAP during
recording? ≥With DVD-RAM, you can, and the audio recorded also changes. Just press [AUDIO].
≥With DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW you cannot. Change
before recording with “Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)” in the Setup menu.
27
64
M6VP&PC.book 68 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
69
RQTV0141
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the remedies indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, refer to the “Customer Services Directory” on page 77 if you reside in the U.S.A. In other areas, consult your dealer.
Power Page
Displays Page
Operation Page
The following do not indicate a problem with the unit:
≥Regular disc rotating sound.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric condition.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Periodic interruptions to reception due to satellite broadcasting breaks.
≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a Panasonic disc.)
≥The unit freezes due to the activation of one of its safety devices. (Press and hold [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)
No power ≥Insert the AC power supply cord securely into a known active AC outlet. 14
The unit switches to the
standby mode. ≥This is a power saving feature. Change “Off Timer” in the “Setup” menu, if you would prefer.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit to turn the unit
on.
63
–
The display is dim. ≥Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu. 65
“12:00A” is flashing on the
unit’s display. ≥Set the clock. 19, 22
The recording time display,
the transfer (copying)
process display and the
displayed recording time of
MP3 are different from the
actual time.
≥Times shown may disagree with actual times.
≥In DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL the remaining capacity does not increase even if titles are
deleted.
≥Available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases when the last
recorded title is deleted. (The recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted.)
≥If you repeat recording or editing about 200 times or more, the remaining capacity of the DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL is reduced and then recording or editing may be disabled. (For the second
layer on DVD-R DL and +R DL, this happens after about 60 times.)
≥The time during fast forward and rewind, or the process during transfer (copy) may not be displayed
accurately.
–
–
–
–
–
Compared to the actual
recorded time, the elapsed
time displayed is less.
≥
70
RQTV0141
Troubleshooting guide
Picture Page
Sound Page
TV reception worsens after
connecting the unit. ≥This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment. It can
be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers.
–
The images from the unit do
not appear on the TV.
Picture is distorted.
≥Make sure that the TV is connected to the VIDEO OUT terminal, S VIDEO OUT terminal,
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals or HDMI AV OUT terminal on the unit.
≥Make sure that the TV’s input setting (e.g., VIDEO 1) is correct.
≥The TV isn’t compatible with progressive signals. Press and hold [∫] and [“DVD] on the main unit at
the same time for about 5 seconds. The setting will change to interlace.
≥When connecting with a component video cable to a television that is incompatible with progressive
video, check if there is also an HDMI cable connected to an amplifier, etc. If so, turn the power off to
the device connected with an HDMI cable, and set the “HDMI Video Output” to “Off” in the Setup
menu.
≥To output video from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “HDMI Video Output” to “On” in the
Setup menu.
≥Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
14–17
–
–
–
–
–
Status messages do not
appear. ≥Select “Automatic” in “Status Messages” in the Setup menu. 65
The blue background does
not appear. ≥Select “On” in “Blue Background” in the Setup menu. 65
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture
expands left and right.
Screen size is wrong.
≥Use the TV to change the aspect. If your TV does not have that function, set “Progressive” in the
Video menu to “Off”.
≥If you connect an HDMI cable, set “HDMI Output Display Aspect” in the Setup menu to “Normal”.
≥Check the settings for “TV Type”, “4:3 TV Settings for DVD-Video”, or “4:3 TV Settings for DVD-
RAM” in the Setup menu.
40
65
65
There is a lot of after-image
when playing video. ≥Set “DNR” in the Video menu to “Off”. 40
When playing DVD-Video
using progressive output,
one part of the picture
momentarily appears to be
doubled up.
≥Set “Progressive” in the Video menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method or
material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.
≥When you use the HDMI AV OUT terminal for video output, follow the steps below for setting.
(1) Connect this unit to the TV with any cable except the HDMI cable
(2) Set “HDMI Video Output” in the Setup menu to “Off”
40
–
65
There is no apparent change
in picture quality when
adjusted with the Video menu
in the on-screen menus.
≥The effect cannot be seen with certain types of video. –
No sound.
Low volume.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired
audio type.
≥Check the connections and “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the amplifier if
you have connected one.
≥Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.
≥Set “V. Surround Sound” in the Audio menu to “Off” in the following cases.
-When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.
-When playing MTS broadcast titles.
≥This unit cannot playback multi-channel discs that prevent down-mixing unless the unit is connected
with a HDMI cable to an amplifier supporting CPPM and the HDMI standard version 1.1. Refer to the
disc jacket for more information. [DVD-A]
≥The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal
or the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.
≥Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
≥When the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (Optical) terminal is used for audio output and the unit is connected
to the television with a HDMI cable, set "HDMI Audio Output" to “Off” in the setup menu.
≥If the sound is distorted when the unit is connected to an amplifier with the HDMI cable, adjust the
settings in “HDMI Connection Speakers Setting” in the Setup menu to match the connection.
≥Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this unit is connected with a
HDMI cable.
16, 64
27, 33
40
–
–
–
65
65
–
Cannot switch audio. ≥You cannot change the audio type when a DVD-R, a DVD-R DL, a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), a
+R, a +R DL or a +RW is in the disc tray.
≥You cannot change the audio type when playing a DVD-R, a DVD-R DL, a DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), a +R, a +R DL or a +RW. (You can select “Main” or “Secondary Audio Program (SAP)” in
“Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)” in the Setup menu before recording.)
≥You have used a digital connection. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using audio cables
(analog connection).
≥There are discs whose audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.
–
64
16, 64
–
M6VP&PC.book 70 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
71
RQTV0141
Recording, Scheduled recording, Transfer (Copying), External input Page
Cannot record. ≥You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the unit can
record onto.
≥The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to “PROTECT” or the disc is protected with “DVD
Management”.
≥Some programs have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM).
≥The disc is full or nearly full. Delete unneeded titles or use another disc.
≥You cannot record on finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or
DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format) discs.
≥If you repeatedly insert discs or turn the unit on and off about 50 times or more, the recording or
editing of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW may be disabled.
≥A DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW recorded on the unit may not
be recordable on other Panasonic DVD recorders.
≥The material you are trying to record is copy-protected.
≥Scheduled recording will not be activated when in editing or transfer (copy). Scheduled recording will
begin after the editing/transfer (copy) is finished.
6
61
60
6, 76
41, 59
61
–
–
–
–
Scheduled recording does
not work properly. ≥The scheduled recording program is incorrect or different scheduled recording times overlap.
Correct the program.
≥The clock is not correct. Set the clock.
≥Scheduled recording will not be activated during formatting, transfer (copying) and other such
operations which should not be interrupted when they are being carried out.
31
19, 22
–
Scheduled recording does
not stop even when
[∫,STOP] is pressed.
≥If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Quick Start” is set to “On”, you
cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.
63
The scheduled recording
program remains even after
recording finishes.
≥The scheduled recording program remains if set to daily or weekly. 31
A part or whole of a recorded
title has been lost. ≥If the power shuts down or the plug is disconnected from the household AC outlet while recording or
editing, the program may be lost or the disc may become unusable. We cannot offer any guarantee
regarding lost titles or discs. You will have to format the disc ([RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc.
–
Cannot transfer (copy) VHS
to DVD. ≥The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to “PROTECT” or the disc is protected with “DVD
Management”.
≥Some video tapes on the market (including rental videos) are copy-protected to prevent illegal
reproductions. Copy-protected video tapes cannot be properly recorded.
≥You cannot use the transfer (copying) function when the FUNCTIONS window, the Scheduled
Recording List screen, etc. are displayed.
60
–
–
Cannot transfer (copy) DVD
to VHS. ≥A video cassette without the accidental erasure prevention tab is inserted. Use a video cassette with
an accidental erasure prevention tab.
≥Some DVDs on the market (including rental DVD) are copy-protected to prevent illegal
reproductions. Copy-protected DVDs cannot be properly recorded.
≥You cannot use the transfer (copying) function when the FUNCTIONS window, the Scheduled
Recording List screen, etc. are displayed.
11
–
–
The sound level after editing
is not equal on DVD and on
VHS.
≥The sound level on DVD and VHS may not match depending on the disc. When the sound level in a
particular part of the sound source is soft or loud, the sound may be recorded loudly or softly on a
video tape.
–
Stripe-shaped black noise is
recorded. ≥The device in playback is interfering with the TV because the device is too close to the TV. Move the
device away from the TV.
–
Cannot record video or
sound from the external
device.
≥The external device is not correctly connected.
≥The proper external input channel (IN1, IN2 or DV) is not selected.
57
57
The DV automatic recording
function does not work. ≥If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the connections and DV
equipment settings.
≥You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television.
≥Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV equipment are
not successive.
≥Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate properly.
≥You can only record audio/video images on a DV tape.
57
–
–
–
–
Troubleshooting guide
M6VP&PC.book 71 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
72
RQTV0141
Troubleshooting guide
Play Page
Edit Page
Play fails to start even when
[1,PLAY] is pressed.
Play starts but then stops
immediately.
≥Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.
≥The disc is dirty.
≥You tried to play a blank disc or a disc that is unplayable on the unit.
≥You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalized on the equipment used for recording.
≥When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8H) mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that
are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use EP (6H) mode.
≥You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.
24
10
7
–
64
–
Audio and video momentarily
pause. ≥This occurs between playlist chapters.
≥This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
–
32
DVD-Video is not played. ≥Some DVD-Video cannot be played when you change the ratings level. 63
Alternative sound track and
subtitles cannot be selected. ≥Multiple languages are not recorded on the disc.
≥You may have to use the disc’s own menus to select languages.
–
32
No subtitles. ≥When progressive output is on, closed captions cannot be displayed.
≥Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
≥Set “Subtitle” in the Disc menu to “On”.
–
–
39
Angle cannot be changed. ≥This function depends on software availability. Angles can only be changed during scenes where
different angles are recorded.
–
You have forgotten your
ratings password. ≥With the tray open, keep pressing [¥, REC] and [1] on the main unit simultaneously for about 5 or
more seconds.
–
Quick View does not work. ≥This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
≥This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.
–
–
The resume play function
does not work. ≥Memorized positions are canceled when the unit is turned off or when the tray is opened. The
memorized position on the playlist is also canceled when the playlist and title are edited.
–
Cannot format. ≥The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
≥You tried formatting a disc that is not compatible with the unit.
10
7
Cannot create chapters.
Cannot mark the start point
or the end point during
“Shorten Title” operation.
≥The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the disc.
The information is not written if there is an interruption in the power before this.
≥These operations are not possible with still pictures.
≥You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before a start
point.
–
–
–
Cannot delete chapters. ≥When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer. 43
The available recording time
doesn’t increase even after
deleting recordings on the
disc.
≥Available recording space on the DVD-R, the DVD-R DL, the +R or the +R DL does not increase
even after deleting previously recorded titles.
≥Available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases when the last
recorded title is deleted. (The recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted.)
–
–
Cannot create a playlist. ≥You cannot select all the chapters in a title at once as the source of playlist edition if the title also
includes still pictures. Select them individually.
–
M6VP&PC.book 72 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
73
RQTV0141
Still pictures Page
VHS Picture Page
VHS Sound Page
VHS Play Page
VHS Recording, scheduled recording Page
Cannot display Direct
Navigator screen. ≥This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy. –
Cannot edit or format a card. ≥Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards, the “Write Protection Off” message
sometimes appears on the screen even when protection has been set.)
60
The contents of the card
cannot be read. ≥The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card may be damaged.)
Format using FAT 12 or FAT 16 with other equipment or format the card with this unit.
≥The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible with this unit.
≥Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
≥SD memory cards from 8 MB to 2 GB can be used with this unit.
8, 36,
60
8
–
–
Copying, deleting and setting
protection takes a long time. ≥When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few hours.
≥When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time. Format the disc or card.
–
60
Scheduled recording began
in the middle of editing a still
picture.
≥If it comes to the time scheduled for recording, the recording may start even though you are editing. –
OSD messages do not
appear. ≥Go to Setup and select “Automatic” in “Status Messages”.
Press [STATUS] to show the on-screen messages constantly.
38, 65
The blue back appears
during play. ≥You are playing a blank or poor quality part of the tape.
≥You can damage the unit if you play dirty or damaged tapes and this can cause the blue back to
appear. Consult your dealer.
–
–
Cannot hear the desired
audio type. ≥Press [AUDIO] to select the audio. 33
There is noise when playing a
video tape. ≥Adjust the tracking.
≥The tape is old or damaged.
38
–
Cannot play. ≥Tapes recorded under a TV system other than NTSC (PAL, SECAM, etc.) cannot be played. –
The playback screen flickers. ≥The video head is dirty.
≥The tape is too old or damaged.
–
–
“1” flashes when I try to
start recording.
Cannot record.
≥A video cassette is not inserted. Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
≥The erasure prevention tab has been removed. Cover the hole with adhesive tape.
24
11
Cannot record TV program. ≥The desired channel is not selected. Select the desired TV program. –
Troubleshooting guide
M6VP&PC.book 73 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
74
RQTV0141
Product Service
1. Damage requiring service — The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel if:
(a)The AC power supply cord or AC adaptor has been damaged; or
(b)Objects or liquids have gotten into the unit; or
(c)The unit has been exposed to rain; or
(d)The unit does not operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or
(e)The unit has been dropped or the cabinet damaged.
2. Servicing — Do not attempt to service the unit beyond that described in these operating instructions. Refer all other servicing to authorized
servicing personnel.
3. Replacement parts — When parts need replacing ensure the servicer uses parts specified by the manufacturer or parts that have the same
characteristics as the original parts. Unauthorized substitutes may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.
4. Safety check — After repairs or service, ask the servicer to perform safety checks to confirm that the unit is in proper working condition.
For product information or assistance with product operation:
Refer to “Customer Services Directory” on page (l77).
User memo:
Product information
The model number and serial number of this product can be
found on either the back or the bottom of the unit.
Please note them in the space provided below and keep for
future reference.
MODEL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
DATE OF PURCHASE
DEALER NAME
DEALER ADDRESS
TELEPHONE NUMBER
M6VP&PC.book 74 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
75
RQTV0141
Specifications (common to DMR-ES45V and DMR-ES46V)
Note
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Mass and dimensions shown are approximate.
≥Useable capacity will be less (SD Memory Card).
Power supply: AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Power consumption: Approx. 29 W
Standby mode: (Display ON) Approx. 3.2 W
(Display OFF) Approx. 3.0 W
Recordable discs:
DVD-RAM: Ver. 2.0
Ver. 2.1/3X-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 1.0
Ver. 2.2/5X-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 2.0
DVD-R: for General Ver. 2.0
for General Ver. 2.0/4X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 1.0
for General Ver. 2.x/8X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 3.0
for General Ver. 2.x/16X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 6.0
for DL Ver. 3.0
for DL Ver. 3.x/4X-SPEED DVD-R for DL Revision 1.0
DVD-RW: Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.1/2X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 1.0
Ver. 1.2/4X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 2.0
+R: Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2
for DL Ver. 1.0
+RW: Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2/4X-SPEED
Recording system:
DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R: DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD-Video format
DVD-RW: DVD-Video format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
Recording time:
Max. 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour SP: Approx. 2 hours
LP: Approx. 4 hours EP: Approx. 6 hours or 8 hours
Playable discs:
DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R: DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD-Video format
DVD-RW: DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD
CD-R/CD-RW (CD-DA, Video CD, MP3, JPEG)
Optical pick-up:
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
LASER Specification:
Class 1 LASER Product
Wave Length: 780 nm (CDs)
662 nm (DVDs)
Laser Power: No hazardous radiation is emitted with the
safety protection
Television system:
TV system: NTSC system, 525 lines, 60 fields
Antenna reception input:
TV Channel: VHF: 2 ch to 13 ch
UHF: 14 ch to 69 ch
CATV Channel: 5A & A-5 ch to EEE ch
Quick Start for Recording (Quick Start : ON)
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording on DVD-RAM°
°From the power off state, recording on DVD-RAM starts about 1 second
after first pressing the Power button and then sequentially pressing the
REC button (Quick Start Mode).
Video system:
Recording system: (for DVD)
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Input: LINE (pin jack)k2 1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
S connectork2 Y: 1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
C: 0.286 Vp-p; 75 ≠
Output: (for DVD PRIORITY)
LINE (pin jack)k2 1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
S connectork2 Y: 1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
C: 0.286 Vp-p; 75 ≠
Component video output: (for DVD PRIORITY)
Y, PB, PRk1 Y: 1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
(480i/480p) PB: 0.7 Vp-p; 75 ≠
PR: 0.7 Vp-p; 75 ≠
Audio system:
Recording system: (for DVD)
Dolby Digital (2 ch)
Linear PCM (XP mode 2 ch)
Analog Input: LINE (pin jack)k2
Reference input: 309 mVrms
FS: 2 Vrms (1 kHz, 0 dB)
Input impedance: 22 k≠
Analog Output: (for DVD PRIORITY)
LINE (pin jack)k2
Reference output: 309 mVrms
FS: 2 Vrms (1 kHz, 0 dB)
Output impedance: 1 k≠
(Load impedance: 10 k≠)
Number of channels: (for DVD)
Recording: 2 channels
Playback: 2 channels
Number of track: (for VHS)
HiFi: 2 track
Normal: 1 track
Digital Output: (for DVD PRIORITY)
Digital audio optical output connectork1
(PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS)
VHS:
Recording format: VHS Video Cassette System Standard with FM audio
Heads: 4 Helical Scan Heads for Video
2 Helical Scan Heads for FM audio
1 Fixed Head for Normal audio
Tape speed/Recording time:
SP: 33.35 mm/s, 120 min (with T-120 cassette)
EP: 11.12 mm/s, 360 min (with T-120 cassette)
FF/REW time: FF/REW: Approx. 60 s (with T-120 cassette)
Jet REW: Approx. 43 s (with T-120 cassette)
HDMI Output: 19 pin typeAk1
HDMI Ver. 1.2a (EDID Ver. 1.3)
DV Input: IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 Pink1
SD Card Slot:
Still picture (JPEG, TIFF):
SD Memory Card Slot 1 pc
Compatible media: SD Memory Card°, MultiMediaCard
°includes miniSD™ Cards (A miniSD™ adaptor
needs to be inserted)
Format: FAT12, FAT16
Image File Format: JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for
Camera File system), TIFF (Uncompressed
RGB chunky), DPOF Compatible
Sub sampling 4:2:2 or 4:2:0
Number of pixels: Between 34k34 pixels and 6144k4096 pixels
Thawing time: Approx. 3 sec (6M pixels, JPEG)
Regional Code: # 1
Clock unit: Quartz-controlled 12-hour digital display
Operating temperature range:
5 oC to 40 oC (41 oF to 104 oF)
Operating humidity
range
:
10% t o 80% RH (no condensation)
Dimensions: Approx. 430 mm (W)k84 mm (H)k343 mm (D)
[Approx. 16
15
/
16
q (W)k3
5
/
16
q (H)k13
7
/
8
q (D)]
Mass: Approx. 5.4 kg (Approx. 11.9 lbs)
Product Service/Specifications
M6VP&PC.book 75 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
76
RQTV0141
Glossary
Bitstream
This is a signal compressed and converted into digital form. It is
converted back to a multi-channel audio signal, e.g., 5.1-channel, by
a decoder.
CPPM (Content Protection for Prerecorded Media)
A copy protection system used for DVD-Audio files. This unit
supports CPPM.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your TV’s
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing. If this is the case, this
unit can only output the front two channels.
Tracks that do not allow down-mixing will not play correctly on this
unit except when connecting with an HDMI cable to an amplifier that
meets HDMI Ver. 1.1 standards and is CPPM compatible.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)
DPOF is the standard printing format for still picture data taken by a
digital camera, etc. It is used for automatic printing at a photo
developing store or on your home printer.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs. Dynamic range compression
means reducing the gap between the loudest and softest sounds.
This means you can hear dialog clearly at low volume.
Film and Video
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. The unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
≥Film is 24 or 30 frames per second, with motion picture film
generally being 24 frames per second.
≥Video is 60 fields per second (2 fields making up 1 frame).
Finalize
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,
etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can
finalize DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on the unit. After finalizing, the disc becomes play-only and
you can no longer record or edit. However, finalized DVD-RW can
be formatted to become recordable.
Folder
This is a place on the memory card where groups of data are stored
together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place where still
pictures (JPEG, TIFF) are stored.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM and DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video
format) or +RW and SD memory card on this unit.
Formatting irrevocably erases all contents.
Frame and field
Frame refers to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your TV. Each frame consists of 2 fields.
Frame Field Field
≥A frame still shows 2 fields, so there may be some blurring
between them, but picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
HDMI is a next-generation digital interface for consumer electronic
products. Unlike conventional connections, it transmits
uncompressed digital video and audio signals on a single cable. This
unit supports high-definition video output (720p, 1080i) from HDMI
AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high definition
compatible television is required.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding color still pictures. If
you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc., the
data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one-tenth of its size without any considerable loss of
audio quality. You can play MP3s you have recorded onto CD-R and
CD-RW.
Pan & Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they will
be viewed on a widescreen TV (16:9 aspect ratio), so images often
don’t fit regular TVs (4:3 aspect ratio). 2 styles of picture,
“Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture fills the screen.
Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and bottom of the
picture so the picture itself appears in an aspect
ratio of 16:9.
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus displayed on the screen.
(The unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
Progressive/Interlace
NTSC, the video signal standard, has 480 interlaced (i) scan lines,
whereas progressive scanning uses twice the number of scan lines.
This is called 480p.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
Your TV must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.
Protection
You can prevent accidental erasure by setting writing protection or
erasure protection.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
TIFF (Tag Image File Format)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding color still pictures, a
common format for storing high quality images on digital cameras
and other devices.
= +
77
RQTV0141
Limited Warranty
Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company,
Division of Panasonic Corporation of North America
One Panasonic Way Secaucus, New Jersey 07094
Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc.
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5
San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00985
Panasonic DVD Recorder
Limited Warranty
Limited Warranty Coverage
If your product does not work properly because of a defect in materials or workmanship,
Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company or Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc. (collectively
referred to as “the warrantor”) will, for the length of the period indicated on the chart below,
which starts with the date of original purchase (“warranty period”), at its option either (a)
repair your product with new or refurbished parts, or (b) replace it with a new or a
refurbished product. The decision to repair or replace will be made by the warrantor.
During the “Labor” warranty period there will be no charge for labor. During the “Parts”
warranty period, there will be no charge for parts. You must carry-in or mail-in your product
during the warranty period. If non-rechargeable batteries are included, they are not
warranted. This warranty only applies to products purchased and serviced in the United
States or Puerto Rico. This warranty is extended only to the original purchaser of a new
product which was not sold “as is”. A purchase receipt or other proof of the original
purchase date is required for warranty service.
Carry-In or Mail-In Service
For Carry-In or Mail-In Service in the United States call 1-800-211-PANA (7262) or visit
Panasonic Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com
For assistance in Puerto Rico call Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc. (787)-750-4300 or fax
(787)-768-2910.
Limited Warranty Limits And Exclusions
This warranty ONLY COVERS failures due to defects in materials or workmanship, and
DOES NOT COVER normal wear and tear or cosmetic damage. The warranty ALSO DOES
NOT COVER damages which occurred in shipment, or failures which are caused by
products not supplied by the warrantor, or failures which result from accidents, misuse,
abuse, neglect, mishandling, misapplication, alteration, faulty installation, set-up
adjustments, misadjustment of consumer controls, improper maintenance, power line
surge, lightning damage, modification, or commercial use (such as in a hotel, office,
restaurant, or other business), rental use of the product, service by anyone other than a
Factory Servicenter or other Authorized Servicer, or damage that is attributable to acts of
God.
THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS LISTED UNDER
“LIMITED WARRANTY COVERAGE”. THE WARRANTOR IS NOT LIABLE
FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM
THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF
THIS WARRANTY. (As examples, this excludes damages for lost time, travel
to and from the servicer, loss of media or images, data or other recorded
content. The items listed are not exclusive, but are for illustration only.) ALL
EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY
OF MERCHANTABILITY, ARE LIMITED TO THE PERIOD OF THE LIMITED
WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts,
so the exclusions may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other
rights which vary from state to state. If a problem with this product develops
during or after the warranty period, you may contact your dealer or
Servicenter. If the problem is not handled to your satisfaction, then write to the
warrantor’s Consumer Affairs Department at the addresses listed for the
warrantor.
PARTS AND SERVICE WHICH ARE NOT COVERED BY THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY ARE YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
F1003
Product or Part Name Parts Labor
DVD Recorder One (1) Year One (1) Year
Rechargeable Batteries,
DVD-RAM Disc (in
exchange for defective item)
Ten (10) Days Not Applicable
Customer Services Directory
Obtain Product Information and Operating Assistance; locate your nearest Dealer or Servicenter; purchase Parts and
Accessories; or make Customer Service and Literature requests by visiting our Web Site at:
http://www.panasonic.com/consumersupport
or, contact us via the web at:
http://www.panasonic.com/contactinfo
You may also contact us directly at:
1-800-211-PANA (7262),
Monday-Friday 9 am-9 pm; Saturday-Sunday 10 am-7 pm, EST.
For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY : 1-877-833-8855
Accessory Purchases
Purchase Parts, Accessories and Instruction Books online for all Panasonic Products by visiting our Web Site at:
http://www.pasc.panasonic.com
or, send your request by E-mail to:
npcparts@us.panasonic.com
You may also contact us directly at:
1-800-332-5368 (Phone) 1-800-237-9080 (Fax Only) (Monday – Friday 9 am to 8 pm, EST.)
Panasonic Services Company
20421 84th Avenue South, Kent, WA 98032
(We Accept Visa, MasterCard, Discover Card, American Express, and Personal Checks)
For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY : 1-866-605-1277
Service in Puerto Rico
Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc.
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5, San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00985
Phone (787)750-4300, Fax (787)768-2910
Glossary/Limited Warranty
M6VP&PC.book 77 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
79
RQTV0141
Instalación básica
≥Antes de hacer la conexión, apague todos los equipos y lea los
manuales de instrucciones apropiados.
≥El equipo periférico y los cables opcionales se venden por
separado a menos que se indique lo contrario.
Para su referencia
≥Las conexiones del equipo descritas son ejemplos.
≥El equipo periférico y los cables opcionales se venden por
separado a menos que se indique lo contrario
.
∫Cuando la unidad no vaya a utilizarse durante mucho
tiempo
Para ahorrar energía, desenchufe la unidad de la toma de CA. Esta
unidad consume una pequeña cantidad de energía aunque se
encuentre apagada (8 W aproximadamente).
La unidad tiene terminales de salida DVD/VHS COMMON y los de
salida DVD PRIORITY.
v
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
≥Para los terminales de salida DVD/VHS COMMON, pueden
lograrse sea las señales DVD sea las VHS.
DVD PRIORITY OUT
≥Salvo mientras que graba o va haciendo una grabación
programada, con el terminal de salida DVD PRIORITY puede
también reproducir una cinta en el DVD.
Terminal S VIDEO OUT
Los terminales S VIDEO OUT logran una imagen más viva que la del
terminal VIDEO OUT. (El resultado real depende del televisor.)
Tras terminar “Conexión con un televisor”, conecte el cable S VIDEO.
De costumbre puede ver una imagen desde el terminal INPUT2.
Cuando quiere reproducir un VHS mientras graba en DVD, cambie al
terminal INPUT1.
Terminal COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Estos terminales pueden usarse para el entrelazado o la salida
progresiva y proporcionan una imagen más clara que la del terminal
S VIDEO OUT.
Tras terminar “Conexión con un televisor”, conecte el cable
COMPONENT VIDEO.
De costumbre puede ver una imagen desde el terminal
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT. Cuando quiere reproducir un VHS
mientras graba en DVD, cambie al terminal INPUT1.
≥Conecte a los terminales del mismo color.
Televisor Televisor
La unidad
Videograbadora
Videograbadora
La unidad
∫No conecte la unidad mediante una videograbadora
Los sistemas de protección de los derechos de autor afectarán las
señales de video enviadas mediante una videograbadora y la
imagen no se mostrará bien en el televisor.
Conexión con un televisor
∫ Conexión (con cable de audio/vídeo)
Conecte por orden numérico de 1 a 4.
≥Después de esta conexión, ajuste el canal de salida RF “OFF”
(l80), y luego pulse el botón TV/VIDEO del mando a distancia
del televisor para seleccionar el modo de entrada AV al terminal
del televisor conectado. Puede mirar un vídeo desde esta unidad
en su televisor.
∫Conexión (sin cable de audio/vídeo)
No necesita conectar “3”.
La unidad envía una señal al televisor a través de un cable coaxial
de 75 ≠ en el canal 3 o 4. Es posible ver una imagen de vídeo en su
televisor de la misma manera que la que ve en las emisiones
televisivas.
≥Después de esta conexión, ajuste el canal de salida RF “CH3” o
“CH4” (l80).
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
YPBPR
OPTICAL
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
RF
IN
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
AC IN
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
RL
AV OUT
A la
A la
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
A la
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
DVD PRIORITY OUT
1
23
Televisión Cable de pared o
señal de antena
75
h
h
cable
coaxial
75
h
h
cable
coaxial
(incluido)
A la RF IN
A la RF OUT
Cable de alimentación de CA (Incluido)
Conecte solamente después de haber finalizado todas las demás conexiones.
A la toma doméstica
de CA
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
Panel trasero de esta unidad
Cable de audio/vídeo
(incluido)
Rojo Blanco Amarillo
Rojo Blanco Amarillo
Rojo Blanco Amarillo
4
Rojo Blanco Amarillo
Rojo Blanco Amarillo
Rojo Blanco Amarillo
Salida DVD y salida DVD/VHS
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
S VIDEO
YPBPR
OPTICAL
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM) R-AUD
DVD OUT
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
Salida DVD/VHS COMMON
Salida DVD PRIORITY
Para gozar de una más alta calidad de
la imagen
∫ Conexión al terminal SVIDEO IN
∫ Conexión a los terminales COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
MEMO/Instalación básica
M6VP&PC.book 79 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
80
RQTV0141
Instalación básica
Preparación
≥Encienda el televisor y seleccione la entrada de vídeo apropiada a
las conexiones de la unidad (Ejemplo: entrada AV, CH3 o CH4).
≥Si conecta la unidad a través de una caja para televisor de cable o
un receptor de satélite, sintonice su PBS local para que funcione el
ajuste automático del reloj.
Si no hay ningún PBS local, ajuste el reloj manualmente.
[1] Pulse [Í, DVD/VHS POWER].
[2] Pulse [CH,W, X] para
seleccionar un número
de canal de salida RF.
El visualizador de la unidad
Cada vez que pulsa el botón:
CH 3 (Ajustes predeterminados) ,-. CH4 ,-. OFF
^-------------------------------------------------------------------J
[3] Utilice [3, 4] para seleccionar el idioma y pulse
[ENTER].
[4] Pulse [3, 4] para seleccionar “TV de 4:3” o “TV
ancho de 16:9” y pulse [ENTER].
[5] Pulse [3, 4] para seleccionar “Encendido” o
“Apagado” y pulse [ENTER].
Si activa la función “Accionamiento rápido”, seleccione
“Encendido”.
[6] Pulse [3, 4] para seleccionar “Sintonizador” o
“Entrada” y pulse [ENTER].
Cuando no ajusta los canales en esta unidad, seleccione
“Entrada”. La unidad entonces muestra la pantalla “Ajuste
manual del reloj”.
Ajuste manualmente el reloj.
[7] Pulse [ENTER] para iniciar la sintonización
automática por Plug-in.
≥La unidad procede con el ajuste automático del reloj. La hora
aparece cuando esté terminado dicho ajuste.
∫Cuando aparece la pantalla “No se ha encontrado
ningún canal” o la de “Ajus. automát. del reloj no
acabado”
Después de apagar la unidad, confirme lo siguiente y vuelva a
configurar.
≥Compruebe si el cable de antena está firmemente conectado al
terminal RF IN.
≥Si no ajusta los canales en esta unidad, seleccione “Entrada”
en el paso 6.
Pantalla “Ajus. automát. del reloj no acabado.”
Pulse [ENTER] y ajuste manualmente el reloj.
[8] Pulse [ENTER].
∫Si el reloj tiene una hora en adelante o retrasada con
respecto a la hora real
Seleccione “j1” o “i1” en “Ajustar del huso horario” en el menú
CONFIGURACIÓN.
Usted no tiene que cambiar el ajuste cuando está conectado a un
televisor de aspecto estándar de 4:3 que no sea compatible con la
salida progresiva.
[1] Durante la parada
Pulse [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Seleccione “Otras funciones” con [3, 4] y
pulse [ENTER].
[3] Seleccione “CONFIGURACIÓN” con [3, 4] y
pulse [ENTER].
[4] Seleccione “Pantalla TV” con [3, 4] y pulse
[2,1].
[5] Seleccione “Tipo TV” [3, 4] y pulse [ENTER].
≥Aspecto 4:3/Aspecto 16:9:
≥480p/480i:
Seleccione “480p” si el televisor es compatible con la salida
progresiva.
[6] Utilice [3, 4] para seleccionar el elemento y
pulse [ENTER].
∫Para volver a la pantalla anterior
Pulse [RETURN].
∫Para salir de la pantalla
Pulse [RETURN].
Sintonización automática por Plug-in
Conexión
(sin cable de audio/vídeo):
Seleccione “CH3” o “CH4” que
visualiza la pantalla a la derecha.
Conexión
(con cable de audio/vídeo):
Seleccione “OFF”
Acerca de la función “Accionamiento rápido”
Si ajusta Accionamiento rápido en activado, puede iniciar a
grabar al DVD-RAM alrededor de 1 segundo después de que
haya pulsado [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] para encender la
unidad.
Cuando haya seleccionado “Encendido”, tiene lugar lo
siguiente.
≥El consumo de energía en espera aumenta por el hecho de
que se suministra energía a los mandos de la unidad.
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
REC
µ
REC MODE
PAUS ESTOP
∫;
Í
RETURN
FUNCTIONS
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
CH, W, X
DRIVE
SELECT
DRIVE
SELECT
Botones
numéricos
Select Language
Seleccione el idioma
Sélection de langue
Press ENTER
Pulse ENTER
Appuyer sur ENTER
English
Français
Español
El visualizador de la unidad
Seleccionar el tipo de televisor
4:3 16:9
Aspecto estándar de 4:3
Televisor de aspecto panorámico 16:9
M6VP&PC.book 80 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
81
RQTV0141
Grabación de programas de televisión
[1] Pulse [<, OPEN/CLOSE] en la unidad principal
para abrir la bandeja.
≥Puede insertar un disco de cartucho o sin cartucho.
[2] Pulse [<, OPEN/CLOSE] en la unidad principal
para cerrar la bandeja.
≥Si inserta un DVD-RAM con la lengüeta de protección contra
la escritura ajustada en “PROTECT”, la reproducción inicia
automáticamente.
Nota
≥Un disco de doble cara tiene que colocarse con la cara que quiere
grabar/reproducir mirando hacia abajo.
≥No es posible grabar continuamente desde una cara a la otra en
un disco de dos caras. Tendrá que expulsar el disco y darlo la
vuelta.
≥Cuando utilice un DVD-RAM de 8 cm (3q) o un DVD-R de 8 cm
(3q), quite el disco del cartucho.
La superficie a través
de la que puede ver el
rollo de la cinta tiene
que estar de cara
hacia arriba,
Inserte un
videocasete.
≥La unidad se
enciende
automáticamente.
∫Para expulsar un videocasete
≥Puede expulsar el videocasete aun cuando la unidad esté en el
modo de espera. Ésta vuelve a la espera una vez que lo haya
expulsado.
Para la unidad principal
≥Pulse [<, EJECT] en la unidad principal.
Para el mando a distancia
Pulse [DRIVE SELECT] para seleccionar el lado VHS y luego pulse
y mantenga pulsado [∫, STOP] durante 3 segundos o más.
≥[+RW] El menú del título creado se borra cuando graba en el disco.
Vuelva a crear el menú del título usando “Crear menú superior
DVD.” en Gestión del DVD.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [VHS]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
≥Puede grabar hasta 99 títulos en un disco.
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Puede grabar hasta 49 títulos en un disco.
≥No es posible grabar emisiones digitales que permiten “Grabación
sólo una vez” en el DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL,
+RW o discos DVD-RAM de 8 cm (3q). Utilice un CPRM
compatible DVD-RAM
≥La grabación se hará en el espacio vacío del disco. Los datos no
se escribirán encima de otros.
≥Si ya no queda espacio en el disco de grabación, será menester
borrar los títulos innecesarios o utilizar un nuevo disco.
Preparación
≥Cancele la protección. [RAM]
≥Seleccione la unidad que ve el canal (por ejemplo la entrada AV)
en el televisor.
≥Seleccione un tipo de audio que quiere grabar. (l82)
[1] Pulse [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] para encender la
unidad.
[2] Pulse [DRIVE SELECT] para seleccionar la
unidad en la que quiere grabar (DVD o VHS).
[3] Inserte un disco.
≥Cuando usa un DVD-RAM por la primera vez con esta unidad,
formatéelo para garantizar una esmerada grabación.
o
Inserte un videocasete que tenga intacta la
lengüeta de protección contra el borrado
accidental.
[4] Pulse [CH, W, X] para seleccionar el canal.
≥Para seleccionar con los botones numéricos:
[5] Pulse [REC MODE] para seleccionar el modo de
grabación.
[DVD]: XP, SP, LP o EP
[VHS]: SP, EP o VP
[6] Pulse
[
¥, REC] para empezar a grabar.
≥
Durante la grabación no se puede cambiar el canal ni el modo de
grabación. Puede cambiarlos mientras que la grabación está en
pausa, pero el material se graba como un título distinto.
∫Para hacer una pausa en la grabación
Pulse [;, PAUSE]. (Pulse de nuevo para reiniciar la grabación.)
≥El título no se divide en títulos distintos. [DVD]
≥También puede pulsar [¥, REC] para reiniciar la grabación.
∫Para detener la grabación
Pulse [∫, STOP].
≥Grabado como 1 título hasta el punto donde termina. [DVD]
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
La unidad tarda unos 30 segundos en completar la información
para administrar la grabación después de terminar esta última.
Insertar discos
Insertar un videocasete
Antes de grabar
Sólo la principal o SAP pueden grabarse para las emisiones
MTS, cuando graba al DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL,
+RW
Si no conecta una caja de cable
Seleccione “Main” o “SAP” en “Seleccionar MTS” del menú
CONFIGURACIÓN.
Si conecta una caja de cable
Seleccione “Main” o “SAP” en la caja de cable.
(2)
(3)
(1)
Disco sin cartucho Disco en cartucho
(1) Insértelo con la cara impresa hacia arriba.
(2) Inserte completamente hasta que haga un ruido seco.
(3) Insértelo con la etiqueta arriba y la flecha hacia adentro.
Procedimientos de grabación
Cuando graba en un DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (Formato
DVD-Vídeo), +R, +RDL o +RW
≥Cuando graba emisiones MTS
-Si no conecta una caja para televisor de cable
Seleccione “Main” o “SAP” en “Seleccionar MTS” en el menú
CONFIGURACIÓN.
-Si conecta una caja para televisor de cable
Seleccione “Main” o “SAP” en el TV box de cable.
≥La relación de aspecto de la imagen grabada será 4:3.
≥A fin de reproducir DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (Formato
Vídeo DVD) +R, +RDL grabado usando esta unidad en otra
fuente de reproducción, antes tiene que finalizar el disco.
Modo de antena (Ondas
hertzianas)
Ej., “5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
Modo televisor de cable
(Cable)
Ej., “5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
“115”: [1] )[1] )[5]
Instalación básica/Grabación de programas de televisión
M6VP&PC.book 81 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
82
RQTV0141
Grabación de programas de televisión
Dependiendo del contenido que está siendo grabado, los tiempos
de grabación pueden ser inferiores a los indicados.
Esta unidad usa una grabación de velocidad variable de
transferencia de bits (VBR) que varía la cantidad de datos grabados
para adaptar las imágenes, así que los tiempos reales de grabación
mostrados por la unidad resultarán diferentes (la diferencia será
sobre todo evidente con el DVD-R DL y +R DL).
Para estar seguro, utilice un disco en el que queda bastante tiempo.
°1No es posible grabar o reproducir continuamente desde una
cara a la otra en un disco de dos caras.
°2Cuando “Tiempo de grab. en el mode EP” ha sido ajustado a
“EP - Repr. ón ampliada (6H)” en el menú CONFIGURACIÓN.
La calidad del sonido es mejor cuando usa “EP - Repr. ón
ampliada (6H)” que cuando usa “EP - Repr. ón ampliada (8H)”.
°3
No es posible grabar continuamente de la primera capa a la segunda.
Nota
Cuando grabe en un DVD-RAM utilizando el modo EP (8H), puede
que no sea posible reproducir ese disco en reproductores DVD
compatibles con DVD-RAM. En este caso, utilice el modo EP (6H).
FR (modo de grabación flexible):
≥Puede ajustar el modo FR cuando transfiere (copia) o programa
grabaciones programadas.
Nota
No puede reproducir una grabación VP en otro equipo.
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Cuando inserta un disco nuevo y
uno grabado en un ordenador u
otro equipo, podría aparecer una
pantalla de confirmación del
formato. Formatee el disco para
usarlo. Sin embargo, todo el
contenido grabado se va a borrar.
Pulse [2, 1] para
seleccionar “Si” y pulse
[ENTER].
∫Para formatear un disco
Son necesarios muchos pasos para formatear un disco.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Cuando pulsa [<, OPEN/CLOSE] en la unidad principal mientras
que va a parar:
Aparece la siguiente pantalla
cuando no haya procesado el disco
para reproducir en otro equipo.
Cuando finaliza el disco
Pulse [¥, REC].
No puede detener este proceso una
vez que lo haya iniciado.
Mientras graba
Pulse [
¥
, REC] para seleccionar el tiempo de grabación.
≥En la unidad principal, pulse [¥, REC].
El visualizador de la unidad
Cada vez que pulsa el botón:
Contador (cancelar) # OFF 0:30 # OFF 1:00 # OFF 1:30
^------- OFF 4:00 ! OFF 3:00 ! OFF 2:00 !----------}
[RAM]
Pulse [AUDIO].
Estéreo # SAP # Mono
^----------------------------}
∫ Modos de grabación y tiempos de
grabación aproximados (DVD)
DVD-RAM DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R, +RW
(4,7 GB)
Un solo lado
(4,7 GB) Dos lados°1
(9,4 GB)
XP (Alta calidad) 1 hora 2 horas 1 hora
SP (Normal) 2 horas 4 horas 2 horas
LP (Larga duración) 4 horas 8 horas 4 horas
EP
(Duración extralarga)
8 horas
(6 horas°2)
16 horas
(12 horas°2)
8 horas
(6 horas°2)
FR
(Grabación flexible)
8 horas
máximo
8 horas máximo
para una cara
8 horas
máximo
DVD-R DL, +R DL°3 (8,5 GB)
Primera capa (L0) Segunda capa (L1)
XP (Alta calidad) 55 minutos 50 minutos
SP (Normal) 1 hora 50 minutos 1 hora 40 minutos
LP (Larga duración) 3 horas 40 minutos 3 horas 20 minutos
EP
(Duración extralarga)
7 horas 25 minutos
(5 horas 30 minutos
°
2
)
6 horas 50 minutos
(5 horas 15 minutos
°
2
)
FR
(Grabación flexible)
7 horas 25 minutos
máximo
6 horas 50 minutos
máximo
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
DRIVE
SELECT
AUDIO
∫
µ
CH
PLAY
1
ENTER
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
CH
VCR/TV
F Rec
STATUS
RETURN
F Rec
STATUS
VCR/TV
TV/VIDEO
CH, W, X
∫ Modos de grabación (VHS)
Modo de grabación
SP: Puede grabar lo largo mostrado en la cinta.
EP: 3 veces lo largo del modo SP.
VP: 5 veces lo largo del modo SP.
≥
Para lograr una capacidad de grabación más larga, seleccione “EP” o “
VP
”.
≥
Si la calidad de la imagen es importante para usted o por si desea
almacenar la cinta durante un largo período, seleccione “SP”.
≥La unidad puede reproducir cintas grabadas en el modo LP en
otro equipo (“LP” se enciende en el visualizador de la unidad).
modo VP:
≥Una cinta grabada por la unidad en el modo VP no puede
reproducirse por otras videograbadoras. Se recomienda que
se la distingue entre las demás cintas
escribiendo “VP” en su etiqueta, etc.
Cuando reproduce cintas grabadas con el modo VP, necesita más
tiempo para que funcione el alineamiento automático y, con unas
cintas, podría no funcionar en absoluto. Haga el alineamiento
manualmente si fuera éste el caso.
∫ Cuando se visualiza la pantalla de
confirmación del formato
∫ Cuando quita un disco grabado
Para especificar un tiempo para detener
la grabación
–Grabación de un toque
Seleccionar el audio para grabar
ENTER
Este disco no está formateado
correctamente.
Formatear el disco en Gestión DVD.
Formatear
NoSi
Para reproducir en otros lectores DVD ( Finalizar )
La finalizaci
ó
n necesita para permitir reproducir
el disco en otros lectores DVD compatibles. Una ves
finalizados, los titulos no pueden agregarse al
Pulse “REC” para iniciar
a finalizar.
Pulse OPEN/CLOSE para diferir la
final.
ó
n. El disco s
ó
83
RQTV0141
Puede reproducir discos mientras graba VHS. La grabación no
quedará afectada.
≥Reproducción DVD (l84)
Para su referencia
≥No puede grabar en discos mientras graba VHS.
Puede reproducir cintas mientras graba DVD. La grabación no
quedará afectada.
≥Reproducción VHS (l86)
Para su referencia
≥No puede grabar en cintas mientras graba DVD.
Preparación
≥Conexión (sin cable de audio/vídeo)
-Asegúrese de que el indicador TV esté encendido en el
visualizador de la unidad. Por si no está encendido, pulse [VCR/
TV] para encenderlo.
≥Conexión (con cable de audio/vídeo)
-Pulse [TV/VIDEO] para cambiar el modo de entrada a “TV”.
Pulse [CH, W, X] del televisor para seleccionar el
canal TV deseado.
Para su referencia
≥Puede también hacerlo si la unidad está realizando una grabación
programada.
≥La grabación no queda afectada.
[RAM]
Preparación
≥Seleccione el lado DVD pulsando [DRIVE SELECT].
Consejo
≥El sonido no se produce durante el avance rápido.
Puede iniciar a reproducir desde el comienzo del título mientras que
sigue grabándolo.
Mientras hace una grabación normal o una programada
Pulse [1, PLAY].
≥La reproducción inicia mientras que procede la grabación.
Para su referencia
≥La reproducción no puede tener comienzo hasta que hayan
pasado al menos 2 segundos desde el inicio de la grabación.
Puede reproducir un título grabado anteriormente mientras que graba otro título.
[1] Mientras hace una grabación normal o una programada
Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[2] Pulse [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar un título y
pulse [ENTER].
≥ La reproducción inicia mientras que procede la grabación.
∫Para salir de la pantalla DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Para su referencia
≥
Durante la grabación y la reproducción simultáneas, no puede editar ni
borrar títulos con el Direct Navigator ni listas de reproducción.
≥Aunque inicie a reproducir mientras que la unidad está en espera
de la grabación programada, la grabación inicia al llegar la hora
establecida.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
La unidad computa una velocidad de grabación que permite
adaptarla a la hora establecida (dentro del tiempo que queda en el
disco) con la mejor calidad de la imagen.
Preparación
≥Seleccione el lado DVD pulsando [DRIVE SELECT].
≥Seleccione el canal para grabar.
[1] Durante la parada
Pulse [F Rec].
[2] Pulse [2,1] para seleccionar “Hora” y “Min.” y
pulse [3,4] para ajustar el tiempo de grabación.
≥También puede poner el tiempo de grabación con los
botones numéricos.
≥No puede grabar durante más de 8 horas.
[3] Cuando quiere iniciar la grabación
Pulse [3,4,2,1] para seleccionar “Empezar” y
pulse [ENTER].
≥Empieza la grabación.
Para salir de la pantalla sin grabar
Pulse [RETURN].
Para detener la grabación al rato de empezar
Pulse [∫, STOP].
Para mostrar el tiempo restante
Pulse [STATUS].
Para su referencia
≥Durante una grabación flexible, en el visualizador de la unidad se
encienden todos los indicadores del modo de grabación.
≥No es posible cambiar el canal o el modo de grabación mientras
que la grabación flexible está en pausa.
Reproducir DVD mientras graba VHS
Reproducir VHS mientras graba DVD
Ver el televisor mientras graba
Reproducción mientras usted está
grabando
∫ Reproducción desde el comienzo del título
mientras está grabando–Reproducción de
persecución
∫ Reproducción de un título previamente
grabado mientras graba–Grabación y
reproducción simultáneas
Grabación flexible
(Grabación que cabe en el espacio restante del
disco)
La utilización de “GRABACIÓN FLEX.” es conveniente en
este tipo de situaciones.
≥Cuando el espacio libre del disco haga que la selección del
modo de grabación apropiado sea más difícil
≥Cuando usted quiere grabar un programa largo con la mejor
calidad de imagen posible
Ej., grabación de un programa de 90 minutos en un disco
Si selecciona el modo XP, el programa no cabrá en un disco.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM 4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
Si selecciona el modo SP, el programa no cabrá en un disco.
Si selecciona “FLEXIBLE RECORDING”, el
programa cabrá perfectamente en un disco.
Es necesario un segundo disco para
30 minutos del programa.
Sin embargo, quedarán unos 30 minutos
de espacio libre en el disco
Grabación de programas de televisión
M6VP&PC.book 83 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
84
RQTV0141
Reproducir discos
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
[1] Pulse [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] para encender la
unidad.
[2] Inserte un disco. (l81)
[3] Pulse [1, PLAY].
≥La bandeja del disco se cierra e inicia la reproducción
(La unidad necesita algún tiempo para leer el disco antes de
iniciar la reproducción).
≥La reproducción empieza desde el título grabado más
recientemente.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
≥La reproducción empieza desde el comienzo del disco.
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
∫Para detener la reproducción
Pulse [∫, STOP].
La posición de detención se memoriza.
Función de reanudación de la reproducción
Pulse [1, PLAY] para reiniciar la reproducción desde esta posición.
≥[VCD] Según el disco, puede no ser eficaz la función de
reanudación de la reproducción.
≥El punto de detención se elimina cuando:
-Pulsa [∫, STOP] muchas veces.
-Abre la bandeja.
-[DVD-A] [VCD] [CD] Apaga la unidad.
≥Podría aparecer el salva-pantalla a la derecha
cuando detiene la reproducción. Vuelva a pulsar
[∫, STOP] y usted puede usar el sintonizador de
la unidad para ver el televisor.
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
∫Para poner en pausa la reproducción
Pulse [;, PAUSE]. (Pulse de nuevo para reiniciar la reproducción.)
[VCD]
Pulse los botones numéricos para seleccionar un elemento.
Ej.: “5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Pulse [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar un elemento y pulse
[ENTER].
≥Algunas veces puede usar los botones numéricos para
seleccionar un elemento.
Otros botones usados para obrar en los menús
Lea las instrucciones del disco para más detalles sobre el
funcionamiento.
Nota
≥ Si aparece “ ” en el televisor, la unidad o el disco prohíben la
operación.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[1] Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[2] Utilice [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar el título que
quiere ver y pulse [ENTER].
≥Inicia la reproducción.
≥Puede también seleccionar títulos insertando un número de 2
cifras usando los botones numéricos.
Ej.: “5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
≥Si inserta un número más grande que el número total de
títulos, se selecciona el último título.
∫Para eliminar la lista de títulos
Pulse [RETURN].
Para su referencia
≥Iconos de la pantalla Direct Navigator
:Título protegido
:Protegido contra copia así que él no se pudo grabar.
t:No puede reproducir
¥:En grabación
:Título con restricción “grabación de una sola vez”
[RAM]
Puede ser aumentada la velocidad de reproducción sin distorsionar
el audio.
Durante la reproducción
Mantenga pulsado [1, PLAY].
∫Para volver a la reproducción normal
Pulse [1, PLAY].
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
Durante la reproducción
Pulse [6, SLOW/SEARCH] o [5,
SLOW/SEARCH].
≥Hay 5 velocidades de búsqueda. Aumenta la
velocidad cada vez que se pulsa. ([+R] [+RW] hasta 3 velocidades)
≥Pulse [1, PLAY] para reiniciar la reproducción.
Para su referencia
≥El sonido sólo se produce al primer nivel de avance rápido. En el
caso de DVD Audio (salvo las porciones de imágenes en
movimiento), CD y MP3, él se produce en todos los niveles.
≥Dependiendo del disco puede que la búsqueda resulte imposible.
Preparación
≥Encienda el televisor y seleccione la apropiada entrada de
vídeo para adaptar las conexiones a la unidad.
≥Seleccione el lado DVD pulsando [DRIVE SELECT].
Reproducir discos
DVD/VHS
CHAPTER
CREATE
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
AB
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
DELETE
ADD/DLT
CH
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
VOLUME
CH
CH
POWER
POWER
PLAY
PAUS ESTOP
SKIP/
INDEX
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
FF
3
2
1
6
54
9
8
7
0
INPUT
SELECT
VCR/TV
F Rec
REC MODE
SUB MENU
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP
/
JET REW
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
DISPLAYAUDIO
REC
STATUS
TRACKING/V-LOCKTRACKING/V-LOCK
RESETRESET
CANCEL
DRIVE
SELECT
DRIVE
SELECT
Í
TIME SLIP
AUDIO
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
∫1
6, 5
CREATE
CHAPTER
CM SKIP
:, 9
;
3, 4, 2, 1
2;, ;1
ENTER
RETURN
Botones
numéricos
Salva-pantalla
∫ Cuando aparece una pantalla de menú en el
televisor
Seleccionar títulos grabados para
reproducir
Quick View (Reproducción t1,3)
Avance rápido y rebobinado —
BÚSQUEDA
Reproducir
DVD-RAM
Repr. x1.3
DVD-RAM
t2
DVD-RAM
••••
Ej.,
[RAM]
M6VP&PC.book 84 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
85
RQTV0141
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
Durante la reproducción o mientras está en pausa
Pulse [:, SKIP] o [9, SKIP].
≥Cada pulsación aumenta el número de saltos.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-A] (Partes de imagen móvil solamente) [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Durante la pausa
Pulse [6, SLOW/SEARCH] o [5, SLOW/
SEARCH].
≥Cuando la reproducción de cámara lenta continúa durante
5 minutos, ésta se detiene automáticamente (excluyendo [DVD-A]
[DVD-V] [VCD]).
≥Hay 5 velocidades de reproducción. Su velocidad aumenta a
medida que se pulse.
≥Pulse [1, PLAY] para reiniciar la reproducción.
≥[VCD] Dirección de avance ([5, SLOW/SEARCH]) solamente.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-A] (Partes de imagen móvil solamente) [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Durante la pausa
Pulse [2;] ([2]) o [;1] ([1]).
≥A medida que se pulse se visualiza el encuadre siguiente o el
anterior.
≥Mantenga pulsado para cambiar en orden avance o retroceso.
≥Pulse [1, PLAY] para reiniciar la reproducción.
≥[VCD] Dirección de avance ([;1], [1]) solamente.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
Puede reproducir desde el título, el capítulo o la pista que
selecciona.
Durante la reproducción
Pulse los botones numéricos para seleccionar un
elemento. [CD]
(disco MP3, JPEG y TIFF solamente)
Ej.: “5”: [0] )[5] “5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5] “15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
[DVD-A]
Puede especificarse un número de grupo mientras que está
visualizado el salva-pantalla (l84).
Ej.: “5”: [5]
≥Esto sólo funciona durante la parada con algunos discos (el salva-
pantalla se visualiza).
≥Reproducir grupos adicionales
En unos discos caben grupos adicionales. Si después de
seleccionar un grupo aparece una pantalla de contraseña, escriba
la contraseña con los botones numéricos y pulse [ENTER]. Por lo
que respecta a la contraseña, se remite a la funda del disco, etc.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Puede saltar aproximadamente 1 minuto con una presión.
Durante la reproducción
Pulse [CM SKIP].
[RAM]
Durante la reproducción
Pulse [CREATE CHAPTER].
≥
Pulse [
:
, SKIP] o [
9
, SKIP] para saltar al comienzo de un
capítulo.
≥No puede activar esta función cuando está ejecutando la
transferencia (copia).
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[1] Pulse [TIME SLIP].
[2] Pulse [3, 4] para seleccionar el tiempo y pulse
[ENTER].
La reproducción salta al tiempo especificado.
≥Cada vez que pulsa [3, 4] el tiempo aumenta [3] o disminuye
[4] en intervalos de 1 minuto. (Mantenga pulsado para cambiar a
intervalos de 10 minutos.)
Pulse [AUDIO] para seleccionar el tipo de audio.
≥Según es el medio de grabación puede seleccionar el tipo de
audio.
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Estéreo# Mono L# Mono R
^--------------------------------------}
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [Cuando reproduce una emisión SAP grabada en un
DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (Formato de grabación de vídeo DVD)]
Principal () SAP
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Esto le permite cambiar los elementos como el número de canal de
audio y el idioma de la pista de sonido.
Ej., es el inglés el idioma seleccionado. [DVD-V]
[VHS]
Estéreo
>
Mono L
>
Mono R
>
Sin visualización (pista de audio normal)
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------}
Nota
≥Si no puede cambiar el tipo de audio cuando para la conexión sólo
ha usado un cable óptico digital, ajuste “Dolby Digital” a “PCM”.
Alternativamente, puede conectar a un amplificador con un cable
de Audio/Vídeo y cambiar la entrada en el amplificador para
adaptar la conexión.
Salto
Reproducción de cámara lenta
Vista de encuadre en encuadre
Reproducción directa
Salto CM
Crear capítulos
Salto del tiempo especificado — Time
Slip
Cambio del audio durante la
reproducción
Pista de audio 1 ENG Î Digital 3/2.1ch
Reproducir discos
M6VP&PC.book 85 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
86
RQTV0141
Reproducción de un videocasete
[1] Pulse [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] para encender la
unidad.
[2] Seleccione el lado VHS pulsando
[DRIVE SELECT].
[3] Seleccione la unidad que ve el canal (por
ejemplo la entrada AV) en el televisor.
[4] Inserte una videograbadora. (l81)
[5] Pulse [1, PLAY].
≥La reproducción inicia automáticamente al insertar un
videocasete en el que se haya quitado la lengüeta.
∫Para hacer una pausa en la reproducción
Pulse [;
87
RQTV0141
Index
Angle.............................................................................................39
Antenna System...........................................................................19
Audio
attributes ..................................................................................... 39
channel ....................................................................................... 39
language ..................................................................................... 64
playback...................................................................................... 33
receiving, recording..................................................................... 27
Auto Bilingual Choice.................................................................. 27
Auto SP/EP mode......................................................................... 31
Change Thumbnail................................................................42, 46
Channel
adding, deleting........................................................................... 19
audio ........................................................................................... 39
captions....................................................................................... 20
Set Channel Automatically.......................................................... 19
Chasing playback........................................................................ 28
Cleaning
disc.............................................................................................. 10
lens ............................................................................................... 3
main unit ....................................................................................... 3
video heads................................................................................. 11
Clock Settings..............................................................................22
CM Skip......................................................................................... 33
Connection
amplifier, system component ...................................................... 16
antenna....................................................................................... 15
antenna, television...................................................................... 14
cable box, satellite receiver......................................................... 15
DV input terminal ........................................................................ 57
external device............................................................................ 57
Copy (playlist).............................................................................. 45
CPRM system.......................................................................... 6, 76
Create chapters..................................................................... 33, 46
Create playlists............................................................................ 44
Delete
album .......................................................................................... 48
all titles........................................................................................ 60
chapter........................................................................................ 43
chapter in playlist ........................................................................ 46
playlist......................................................................................... 45
title .............................................................................................. 41
Dialog Enhancer...........................................................................40
Direct Navigator........................................................................... 32
Divide Title.................................................................................... 43
DNR...............................................................................................40
DPOF......................................................................................48, 76
DV automatic recording.............................................................. 57
DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-RDL,
DVD-RW, rR, rRDL, rRW........................................................6
Enter Name
album .......................................................................................... 48
disc.............................................................................................. 60
operation..................................................................................... 58
playlist......................................................................................... 45
title ....................................................................................... 30, 42
Finalize...................................................................................61, 76
Flexible Recording....................................................................... 29
Format Disc.................................................................................. 61
FR (Flexible Recording Mode).................................................... 26
FUNCTIONS window.................................................................... 40
GUI Transfer (Copying)................................................... 51, 53, 55
HDMI.................................................................................. 17, 65, 76
HDAVI............................................................................................17
Intact erasure prevention tab...................................................... 11
Jet Rewind....................................................................................37
JPEG.................................................................................35, 36, 76
Language
audio ........................................................................................... 64
code list....................................................................................... 66
on-screen.................................................................................... 65
soundtrack .................................................................................. 39
subtitle.................................................................................. 39, 64
Menu
Picture......................................................................................... 35
MP3............................................................................................. 34
on-screen.................................................................................... 39
Setup........................................................................................... 63
Mode
recording......................................................................................26
Still Mode.....................................................................................64
MP3................................................................................................34
Noise reduction (NR)
DNR.............................................................................................40
Line-in NR....................................................................................40
One Touch Transfer (Copying)..............................................50, 52
On-screen display.........................................................................38
PCM Down Conversion................................................................64
Picture............................................................................................40
Playlist...........................................................................................44
Progressive..............................................................16, 20, 40, 76
Properties
playlist..........................................................................................45
title ...............................................................................................41
Protection
album ...........................................................................................48
card..............................................................................................60
cartridge.......................................................................................60
disc ..............................................................................................60
still picture....................................................................................47
title ...............................................................................................42
Quick Start................................................................................3, 63
Quick View.....................................................................................32
Ratings...........................................................................................64
Recording modes.........................................................................26
Remaining tape time.....................................................................38
Repeat play..............................................................................37, 39
Restore default settings...............................................................63
Resume play function..................................................................32
Scheduled recording....................................................................30
SD card......................................................................................8, 11
Setup menu...................................................................................63
Shorten Titles................................................................................42
Simultaneous recording and play...............................................28
Soundtrack....................................................................................39
SQPB..............................................................................................37
Status messages ..........................................................................40
Still pictures
copying ........................................................................................55
edit...............................................................................................47
play ..............................................................................................35
Subtitle....................................................................................39, 64
Thumbnail......................................................................................42
TIFF..........................................................................................36, 76
Time Slip........................................................................................33
Tracking.........................................................................................38
Transfer.........................................................................................40
Transfer (Copying)........................................................................49
TV Type..........................................................................................20
VHS settings..................................................................................65
VISS................................................................................................38
VP mode ........................................................................................26
V. Surround Sound.......................................................................40
Reproducción de un videocasete/Index
M6VP&PC.book 87 ページ ２００６年２月６日 月曜日 午後３時２９分
